现代大学英语听力听力原文及题目答案Unit

合集下载

现代大学英语听力UNIT原文及答案

现代大学英语听力UNIT原文及答案

Unit 4Task 1答案A.1 They are farms that grow vegetables for city people to eat fresh.2 It’s a farm that grow plants and flowers to sell.3 They protect the plants from the cold in the winter but let them get plenty of light; so the plants can be grown all through the year.B.1 canned; frozen2 flowers; garden plants; home gardens; yards; window boxes3 buildings; furniture; firewood原文Grain; vegetables and fruits are found on most farms. All of them are food for animals and people.Grain can be fed to animals just as it is harvested. But before people use them grains are usually made into flour or breakfast cereal. Bread; macaroni通心粉; and cereals麦片 all come from grain.Tomatoes; beans; potatoes; beets甜菜; lettuce生菜; carrots and onions are field and garden vegetables. Can you think of any others Vegetables are good for people and for some animals such as pigs and rabbits.Farms that grow vegetables for city people to eat fresh are called truck farms. Truck farms are usually close to big cities. Each day hundreds of loads of fresh vegetables are brought to stores on the farmers' trucks. Without the truck farmers people in cities would not eat well. And without city people who eat fresh vegetables; the truck farmers would have no work.There are many kinds of fruit. Apples; pears; peaches; cherries; oranges; grapefruit; and berries are a few kinds. You will be able to think of other kinds that you like. Most fruit is grown on specialized farms. But many general farms have some fruit to use and sell also.Like vegetables; fruit is sold fresh in markets. But a large part of both fruit and vegetable crops is sent to factories to be canned or frozen.In warm parts of our country farmers grow cotton; rice; tobacco; sugar cane甘蔗; and peanuts.Specialized farms raise flowers and garden plants. They are sold to florists花商 and to families for home gardens; or yards; orwindow boxes. A farm that grow plants and flowers to sell is called a nursery苗圃. Most nurseries have glass buildings; called hothouses or greenhouses. The hothouses are heated to protect the plants from cold in the winter but let them get plenty of light; so they can be grown all through the year.Some farms grow only trees. Some of these are Christmas tree farms. Others are large forests where trees are grown for their wood. The wood is used for buildings; furniture and firewood. Some tree farms grow only nut trees.Task 2答案1 The UN agencies report that the market value of pesticides in developing countries last year was about three thousand million dollars.2 The agencies called for worldwide acceptance of Food and Agriculture and World Health Organization pesticide rules. They say this would help guarantee the safe production of and trade in pesticides.原文Two United Nations agencies are expressing concern about the safety of some pesticides used to kill insects. They report that about thirty percent of all pesticides sold in developing countries fail to meet widely accepted rules for quality. They say these products are a serious threat to human health and the environment.The UN Food and Agriculture Organization and the World HealthOrganization gave the warning.In developing countries; pesticides are used mainly for agriculture. Pesticides kill insects and other organisms that threaten crops. Pesticides also are used for public health. They control insects that spread disease; such as mosquitoes that spread malaria.The UN agencies report that the market value of pesticides in developing countries last year was about three thousand million dollars. They say the estimated market value of pesticides worldwide was thirty-two thousand million dollars.Officials say poor quality pesticides often contain harmful chemicals. These chemicals often are banned or restricted in some countries.Possible causes of low quality in pesticides include production problems and failure to use the right chemicals. Officials say the active chemicals in many pesticides are stronger than those permitted by many governments. They also say poor quality pesticides may contain poisonous substances or substances that are not pure.Officials say the quality of pesticide containers and product information on the containers are other concerns. They say information on the containers often fails to explain the active chemicals and how to use the product safely.The WHO says products listing false information have been sold for years in some areas. The agencies say the problem of poor quality pesticides is widespread in parts of Africa south of the Sahara Desert. They called for worldwide acceptance of Food and Agriculture and World Health Organization pesticide rules. They say this would help guarantee the safe production of and trade in pesticides.Officials say the agencies' rules are especially important for developing countries. They say developing countries often lack systems for testing pesticides.Task 3答案A.1 c 2 d 3 bB.That’s because they’re making an investment all the time; but are still not sure whether or not they can make profits.原文Interviewer: Cattle raising and beef in the US is big business; isn't itBob Beck: Yes; it's the largest business—cattle business.Interviewer: It must be a very profitable business then.Bob Beck: Uh; not necessarily.Interviewer: It's not necessarily a profitable businessBob Beck: At times; it's not profitable. Your production costs get...it's a supply and demand market; and if your supply islarger than your demand...Interviewer: So the price is fluctuating all the time...Bob Beck: Right. It fluctuates; and it can get below production costs.Interviewer: But you never know. For instance; next year; you don't know what it'll bring on the market.Bob Beck: No; technically it takes a year and a half from the time you breed the cow; until you get the calf; until the calf'smarketable.Interviewer: Uh-huh.Bob Beck: You've got a year; to a year and a half; tied up there. Interviewer: So; you're making an investment all the time.Bob Beck: Right. So you're not sure.Interviewer: It sounds like it might be a very insecure kind of existence. Wonder why it is that people want to be farmersor ranchers大农场主 then...Bob Beck: I think the majority of it is you like it. It's one thing.It's a breed kindof people. They like it. If you don'tlike what you're doing; why...Interviewer: What is there about it You live essentially in a rural area. Doesn't that feeling of isolation ever bother you Bob Beck: No. It's getting too crowded.Interviewer: Too crowdedBob Beck: Too many peopleInterviewer: I can see that; for instance; in a city; you have restaurants to go to; movie theaters—all kinds ofthings available to people; a lot of conveniences whichyou don't have in the more rural areas. What do peoplewho farm and ranch do for recreation and relaxation; forinstance... erm...Bob Beck: Well; I think a lot of it is if you're a livestock raiser;you'll go check your cows in the evening instead of goingto a movie.Interviewer: Uh-huh.Bob Beck: That's as much recreation as driving through a bunch or cows; and if you like them; you enjoy that.Interviewer: In terms of the way of life; to a lot of people; it would seem that it's a very hard life. It means a lot ofhard work. I mean; you have a schedule—whether you feellike it or not; you have to get out and feed animals; andso forth. Would you regard that as one of the difficultthings about it; or is that...Bob Beck: No.Interviewer: …just sort of... part of itBob Beck: For me; if I had to go to a desk every morning; that'd kill me.Task 4答案A. paid off; fall back on; a security; operating expenses; complete disasterB.1 Some of them cook the meals; clean the house and take care of the kids every day.2 Yes. That is especially so after they've had one or two bad years when they couldn’t make money.3 When their children are small; they were with their parents to go out to work; when they are very small; Sharon didn’t go out as much as she would later.4 She thinks that in this way the children are a lot more self-reliant. They learn to work and they learn responsibility. They learn a lot about life by being continually in life with animals.原文Bob Beck: I think; for a wife; the same as a husband; they like it or they wouldn't marry a farmer or a rancher.Interviewer: Uh-huh.Bob Beck: They'd get out. I think it's not at all wives. Some of them are just like suburban housewives.Interviewer: Uh-huh.Bob Beck: They cook the meals; and they clean the house and that's it... take care of the kids...Interviewer: Have you known some situations like thatBob Beck: Oh; yeah; I know situations like thatInterviewer: Sharon; is there a problem of the feeling of security Sharon Beck: What kind of security are you talking about—financial securityInterviewer: Uh; yeah; financial security. Uh; the thing is up and down. You don't know what the market's going to bring;er... for beef. You work all year; and so forth... Isthere any problem of that sortSharon Beck: Sure; there's the problem of security. Especially; if you've had one or two bad years. You feel awfullyinsecure.Interviewer: Uh-huh.Sharon Beck: If you've borrowed money to buy a farm or to operate;and there's no money coming in; you feel awfullyinsecure.Interviewer: Uh-huh.Sharon Beck: But if you've got a fairly good amount of your ranch paid off; you've got that to fall back on. You can alwaysthink of that as a security. If everything else fails;if you can’t pay for your operating expenses…Interviewer: Uh-huh.Sharon Beck: ...you can always sell your equity in your ranch. So it isn't complete disaster.Interviewer: But it's not something that bothers you terribly. I mean; it's a fact of life. It's sort of...Sharon Beck: Something you live with; yeah...Interviewer:... part of the thing. The role of the wife in this situation is quite different than that of a suburbanhousewife. You don't have much free time; do you Sharon Beck: No.Interviewer: Because; essentially; you work in much the same way that your husband does.Sharon Beck: Yes; I'm usually with him.Interviewer: How do you handle the whole family-life situation—children You're out almost as much as aworking mother in the city; aren't youSharon Beck: Yes. The only difference is we're together. Interviewer: The children too...Sharon Beck: The children too. When they're not in school; when they were small; they were with us. When they were very small;of course; I didn't go out as much.Interviewer: Do you feel that there are advantages in growing up in this waySharon Beck: Yeah; I definitely feel that there're advantages. There are disadvantages too; but I think the advantages faroutweigh the disadvantages.Interviewer: What are some of those advantages you think thechildren haveSharon Beck: The advantagesInterviewer: Uh-huh.Sharon Beck: Well; they're a lot more self-reliant. They learn to work. Erm; they learn responsibility.Interviewer: Uh-huh.Sharon Beck: They learn a lot about life by being continually in life; with animals; and... I think it makes them...erm... They grow up。

《现代大学英语听力》听力原文及答案Unit修订

《现代大学英语听力》听力原文及答案Unit修订

《现代大学英语听力2》听力原文及答案U n i t1U n i t1Task 1【答案】A.1) She wanted to see St. Paul’s Cathedral.2) She was so surprised because she saw so many Englishmen who looked alike.3) They were all wearing dark suits and bowler hats, carrying umbrellas and newspapers.4) Because she had often read about them and seen photographs of them, who all looked as if they were wearing a uniform.5) No, he didn’t.6) He used the English saying “It takes all kinds to make a world”to prove his opinion.B.If all the seas were one sea, what a great sea it would be! And if all the trees were one tree, what a great tree it would be! And if this tree were to fall in the sea, what a great splash there would be!Yesterday morning Gretel went to the City of London. She wanted to see St. Paul's Cathedral. She was surprised to see so many Englishmen who looked alike. They were all wearing dark suits and bowler hats. They were all carrying umbrellas and newspapers. When she returned home she asked Mr clark about these strange creatures. "They must be typical English gentlemen," she said." I have often read about them and seen photographs of them. They all look as if they are wearing a uniform. Does the typical English gentleman still exist?"Mr. Clark laughed. "I've never thought about it," he answered." It's true that many of the men who work in the City of London still wear bowler hate and I suppose they are typical Englishmen. But look at this." Mr. Clark picked up a magazine and pointed at a photo of a young man. "He's just as typical, perhaps. It seems as if there is no such thing as a 'typical' Englishman. Do you know the English saying 'It takes all kinds to make a world'? That's true of all countries-including England."“Oh, just like the poem ‘If All the Seas Were One Sea’,”Gretel began to hum happily. If all the seas were one sea, what a great sea that would be! If all the trees were one tree, what a great tree that would be! And if this tree were to fall in the sea, w hat a great splash that would be!”Task 2A.1) people were much busier2) colder than England; minus thirty degrees; last longer3) much more mountainous; much higher and much more rocky; more beautiful4) tend to be more crowded5) the houses; smallerB.1) T 2) T 3) F 4) F 5) F【原文】John is British but has worked in Japan. Etsuko is Japanese from Osaka, but she is studying in Britain. In the following passage you are going to hear, they are comparing life as they see it in the two countries. But before listening to it, think of the two countries and try to answer the following pre-listening questions.John: I found that living in Japan, people were busier. They seem to workthe whole day.Etsuko: Yes, that’s right. We work from Monday through Saturday, even in summer. You know, summer in Japan is just horrible. It’s very, very humid and hot, and you need to shower three times a day.John: So you find it cooler in England?Etsuko: Yes, that’s right.John: Where I was living in Japan, in the North, it was much colder than England, especially in winter, minus thirty degrees centigrade. Does the winter in Osaka last longer than the winter in England?Etsuko: No, I don’t think so. December, January, February, March.John: Yes. It’s a little bit shorter if anything.Etsuko: Ever since I came here, I noticed that the countryside here in England is very beautiful.John: It’s much flatter than in Japan.Etsuko: Yes. Japan is a mountainous country and our cities are full of people. There are lots of people in a limited flat area.John: Yes, I found Japan much more mountainous than Britain, especially in the north. The mountains are much higher and much more rocky. I found itmore beautiful than Britain, I think.Etsuko: Yes, if you like mountains.John: And therefore the towns and villages tend to be more crowded.Etsuko: Yes, that’s right.John: Yes. So because the cities are more crowded, the houses tend to be smaller, don’t they?Etsuko: Yes, they are very compact, and we don’t hav e a lot of space. In big cities we have a lot of taller buildings now.John: Is this a problem because there are more earthquakes in Japan?Etsuko: Yes, that’s right and…Task 3【答案】A.1) In the US, people usually dance just to enjoy themselves; they don’t invite other people to watch them.2)Usually eight people dance together.3)Because people form a square in dancing with a man and a woman on eachside of the square.4) He usually makes it into a song.5) They wear old-fashioned clothes.B.1) F 2) T 3) F 4) F 5) TC.1) eight people form a square; on each side of the square2) what they should do; makes it into a song; sings it3) don’t have much time to think4) old-fashioned clothes【原文】Rosa: Why don’t you have folk dances in the United States? Most countries have special dances that the people have done for many years. Thedancers wear clothes from the old days. Everyone likes to watch them dance.Steve: We have folk dances, too. A lot of people belong to folk dancing groups.But when they dance, they usually do it just to enjoy themselves.They don’t inv ite other people to watch them.Rosa: Is there a folk dancing group here?Steve: I think so. There must be. There’s one in almost every city, and some big cities have several.Rosa: What are the dances like?Steve: Usually eight people dance together, four men and four women. When they start, they form a square, with a man and a woman on each sideof the square. That’s why it’s called square dancing.Then there’sa man who tells the dancers what they should do. He usually makesit into a song. He sings it while they dance.Rosa: Oh, that should make the dances easy!Steve: Yes, but they are very fast. They don’t have much time to think.I like to watch them, though. The dancers wear old-fashioned clothes.That makes the dances pretty to watch.Rosa: I’d like to watch a group dance.Steve: I’ll take you sometime.Task 4【答案】1) It was a time to celebrate the end of winter and the beginning of spring.2) They burned the picture of their kitchen god to bring good luck.3) The custom said the brides must wear “something old, something new,something borrowed, and something blue” to bring good luck.4)Because they could not eat meat, eggs or dairy products during Lent, sothey tried to use up these things before Lent began.5)It was a straw man made by children in Czech; it was a figure of death.6)People brought their animals to church. And before the animals went intothe church people dressed them up in flowers and ribbons.【原文】1) On the evening of February 3rd, people in Japanese families took one driedbean for each year of their age and threw the beans on the floor, shouting "Good luck in! Evil spirits out!" This was known as "Setsubun", a time to celebrate the end of winter and the beginning of spring.2) Before the Chinese Lunar New Year in the old days, many Chinese familiesburned the picture of their kitchen god to bring good luck. When Lunar NewYear's Day came, they put ancw picture of the kitchen god on the wall. 3) When American women got married, they sometimes followed an old customin choosing what to wear on their wedding day. The custom said the bride must wear "something old, something new, something borrowed, and something blue". This was to bring good luck.4) Before Lent (a time on the Christian calendar), the people of Ponti, Italyate an omelet made with 1,000 eggs. People could not eat meat, eggs or dairy products during Lent, so they tried to use up these things before Lent began.5) When winter ended in Czech, the children made a straw man called "Smrt",which was a figure of death. They burned it or threw it in the river. After they destroyed it, they carried flowers home to show the arrival of spring. 6) January 17th was St. Anthony's Day in Mexico. It was a day when peoplebrought their animals to church. But before the animals went into the church, the people dressed them up in flowers and ribbons. This ceremony was to protect people's animals.Task 5【答案】A.1) F 2) T 3) F 4) T 5) F 6) T 7) T B.【原文】Man: Well, I think life used to be much more fun than it is now. I mean, look at the Victorians. They had lots of servants to do all the work;they never had to do any cooking or cleaning; they just wore those beautiful dresses and went to tea parties.Woman: You must be joking! Their clothes were terribly uncomfortable and their tea parties were very formal and boring. They used to wear their hats and long gloves even when they were eating cakes and biscuits.And men were not usually invited.Man: Really? Weren't they?Woman: And think of the poor servants. What a terrible life —just cleaning and cooking for other people all the time!Man: But you hate housework!Woman: Yes, I know, but there are lots of machines now to help you with the housework. People don't need servants.Man: Maybe they don't, but life then was much slower than it is now-people nowadays are always rushing, and they never have time to stop and enjoy themselves.Woman: Life then was fine for the rich, but it was dreadful for the poor.There was much more illness. They didn't have the money to pay doctors,and they often used to die of illnesses that don't exist in England now.Man: Maybe. But people used to talk to each other, play the piano or play cards together. Nowadays people just sit in front of the television for hours and never talk to each other.Woman: I agree with you about television; but what about their children? They left their Children with the servants all day. Children hardly ever saw their parents! And the clothes they had to wear! Horrible, tight, uncomfortable, grown-up clothes. Children have a much better life now than they used to, and schools and education are much better too. Man: I hate school.Woman: And look at opportunities for women. In those days, women used to stay at home, play the piano, change their clothes several times a day and have tea parties. What a life! They didn't have any freedom at all.I'm very happy living now. I can work, have a career, do what I want to.Man: You mean you can work hard all your life like a Victorian servant. Woman: Life isn't all tea parties, you know.Task 6【答案】A.1) b 2) a 3) c 4) aB.1) family unit; process; change; used to be; the extended; the nuclear2) job patterns; progressed; agricultural; industrial; forced; job opportunities; split up3) traditional; family; expanded; other living arrangementsC.1) mother, father, children, and some other relatives, such as grandparents, living in the same house or nearby2)only the parents and the children3)previously married men and women marry again and combine the children fromformer marriages into a new family【原文】The American family unit is in the process of change. There used to be mainly two types offamilies: the extended and the nuclear. The extended family most often included mother, father, children, and some other relatives, such as grandparents, living in the same house or nearby. Then as job patterns changed and the economy progressed from agricultural to industrial, people were forced to move to different parts of the country for job opportunities. These moves split up the extended family. The nuclear family became more prevalent; this consisted of only the parents and the children. Now besides these two types of traditional groupings, the word "family" is being expanded to include a variety of other living arrangements.Today's family can be made up of diverse combinations. With the divorce rate nearly one in two, there is an increase in single parent homes: a father or mother living with one or more children. "Blended families" occur when previously married men and women marry again and combine the children from former marriages into a new family. On the other hand, some couples are deciding not to have any children at all, so there is an increase in childless families. There are also more people who live alone: single, widowed, divorced. Now one in five Americans lives alone.Task 7【答案】A.B.1) c 2) c 3) a 4) b 5) c 6) c 7) c【原文】In Japan both men and women go to university and both men and women study the arts such as history or English. But very few women study science, medicine or engineering. In engineering classes of thirty or forty students, there may be only one or two women. Men and women both go to university in order to get good jobs: men want to work for a big company, be successful, earn a lot of money and support a family; women, on the other hand, want to work for a big company because they have a better chance of meeting a successful man and getting married. This is changing, however, as Japanese women begin to think about their own careers. They have began to take jobs which they like rather than jobs in order to find a husband.Men work for their whole lives and usually stay with the same company.A woman may work up to ten years, but after that she usually gets married. Most women are married by the age of twenty seven, then they stay at home and look after the children. A man does not cook or look after the children. When he comes home, his meal must be ready. The woman may go out in the afternoon, shopping with her friends or having a chat, but she must go back home by four o'clock to prepare the meal. Then she may have to wait a long time for her husband to come home. Often he has to go out for a drink after work: if he doesn't he may not rise very high in the company. After her children grow up, a woman can go back to work, but it is not easy. If her former company takes older women back, she might be lucky. But most women find it difficult to find a job when they are older.Task 8【答案】A.1) a 2) c 3) b 4) c 5) c 6) b 7) c 8) bB.1) T 2) T 3) F 4) F 5) T 6) F 7) F 8) F 9) T 10) F【原文】Matthew: Geth, how do people set about getting married in England?Geth: I suppose the most common way is still for people to go home. For example, people who live in London now will go back to their homesin the provinces where they'll meet all their relatives and theirparents, and they'll get married in a church, with the bride wearingwhite, the traditional white. Then they'll go off and have a booze-upwith their relatives and friends and a jolly good time will be hadby all. Otherwise you can get married in a registry office, whichmeans you turn up with your bride-to-be or bridegroom-to-be with twowitnesses only. The ceremony takes about five minutes, I suppose.You sign the form and that's it.Matthew: There are many today who say that marriage is a complete waste of time. What's your view of marriage in the twentieth century?Goth: Well, I live in London as you know. I think in London, the tendency is to... for a... boy and girl, man or woman to live together beforemarriage and often to live together without any prospect of marriageat all. I think this probably is... is true of London and the otherbig cities than elsewhere, because after all people in London areliving in a big place where home ties are obviously less restrictive.They can do more or less as they please and I think this is thepattern.Matthew: But do you think it helps for people to live together before taking their vows?Geth: I think in a sense the habit of living together before marriage may, in a strange sort of way, make marriage stronger, because after allthe people will know each other better when they do get married andit might be suggested that divorce would be less likely between sucha couple.Matthew: Sue, you've been married for two or three years now. How's it working out?Sue: I think it's a successful marriage. It's... I mean, it's difficult to say why, because we basically suit each other very much. We havea good friendship, apart from anything else, and, you know, we justgo together very well because we respect each other's freedom andindividuality, but on the other hand we really need each other, youknow, it's...Matthew: What about.., have you thought of having children?Sue: Well, obviously, like most young couples, we have thought about it, but, you know, we both feel rather, sort of, loath to lose our freedomjust yet. I think we'll probably wait another few years. Matthew: Is it easy in England today to people to get divorced, or is thatquite difficult?Chris: I think technically it's probably fairly easy, I think, because I'm not English but, I think technically it's fairly easy to be... to getdivorced. But it's not just the technicality of it which is the problem.Divorce is... is a social stigma which people can probably Cope withto varying degrees, but it's also a lot easier for the man becausethe woman, after she is divorced is, in fact, frowned upon by... bya lot of people in society. She is... is... at a... a much moredifficult social position in terms of... of meeting other men, orwhatever, simply because she is a divorcee.Task 9【原文】Social customs and ways of behaving change. But they do not necessarily always change for the better. Things which were considered impolite many years ago are now acceptable. Just a few years ago, it was considered impolite behaviour for a man to smoke on the street. No man who thought of himself as being a gentleman would make a fool of himself by smoking when a lady was in the room.The important thing to remember about social customs is not to do anything that might make other people feel uncomfortable — especially if they areyour guests. There is a story about a rich nobleman who had a very formal dinner party. When the food was served, one of the guests started to eat his peas with a knife. Other guests were amused or shocked, but the nobleman calmly picked up his knife and began eating in the same way. It would have been bad manners to make his guest feel foolish or uncomfortable.。

《现代大学英语听力1》Unit 1习题答案及原文

《现代大学英语听力1》Unit 1习题答案及原文

Task 1Okay, Okay, let’s begin. Hello,everyone. My name is Susan Hudson, and I’ll be your teacher for this class, International Communication.Uh, to begin with, please take a look at the syllabus in front of you. As you all should know by now, this class meets on Tuesdays and Thursdays from 3:15 to 4:50. We will be meeting in this room for the first half of the course, but we will be using the research lab every other week on Thursday in room 405 during the last two months of the class.Uh, this is the text for the class, Beyond Language. Unfortunately, the books haven’t come in yet, but I was told that you should be able to purchase them at the bookstore the day after tomorrow. Again, as you see on your course outline, grading is determined by your performance on a midterm and final test, periodic quizzes, uh, a research project, and classroom participation.My office hours are from 1:00 to 2:00 on Wednesdays, and you can set up an appointment to meet with me at other times as well.Task 2Librarian: Can I help you?Student: Yes. I am a bit confused. My sociology class is supposed to read a chapter in a book called Sociology and the Modern Age. According to the syllabus, the book is in the library, but I haven’t been able to find it.Librarian: Do you have your syllabus with you? May I see it?Student:Yes, uh… I put it in the front of my sociology notebook. Yes, here it is. Librarian: Let me see. Oh yes. Your professor has placed this book on reserve. That means you cannot find it on the shelves in its usual place. You need to go to a special room called the reserve room. It’s down the hall and to the right.Student: I’m sorry, I still don’t understand what you mean by on reserve.Librarian: You see, your professor wants every one in the class to read the chapter. If one student removes the book from the library, it is likely that none of the other students will have the opportunity to read it. So, your professor has insured that all students have the opportunity to read it by placing it on reserve.Student: So, will I be able to find this book?Librarian: Yes, when a book is on reserve, a student can go to the reserve room and ask the reserve librarian for the book. The student can have the book for a few hours, and he or she MUST read it in the library during that time. That way, the book stays in the library, and all students have a chance to read it.Student: OK. Thank you. I understand now.Librarian: Will there be anything else?Student: No! I am on my way to the reserve room. Thanks again!Task 3Hello and welcome to the university library. This taped tour will introduce you to our library facilities and operating hours.First of all, the library’s collection of books, reference materials, and other resources are found on levels 1 to 4 of this building. Level 1 houses our humanities and map collections.On level 2, you will find our circulation desk, current periodicals and journals, and our copy facilities. Our science and engineering sections can be found on level 3. You can also find back issues of periodicals and journals older than six months on this level. Finally, group study rooms, our microfilm collection and the multimedia center are located on level 4.Undergraduate students can check out up to 5 books for 2 weeks. Graduate students can check out 15 books for 2 months. Books can be renewed up to 2 times. There is a 50-cents-a-day late fee for overdue books up to a maximum of $15. Periodicals and reference books cannot be checked out.The library is open weekdays, 8:00 am to 10:00 pm, and on Saturdays from 9:00 am to 8:30 pm. The library is closed on Sundays.Task 4Randall: Hi Faith. Do you have a minute?Faith: Sure. What’s up?Randall: Well, I just wanted to go over the schedule for Wednesday’s orientation meeting to make sure everything is ready.Faith: Okay. Here’s a copy of the tentative schedule. [OK.] Now, the registration starts at 8:30 and goes until 9:15. [All right.] Then, the orientation meeting will commence at 9:30.Randall: Okay. Now, we had planned originally for the meeting to go until 10:30, but now we have someone from the international center coming to speak to the students on extra-curricular activities, so how about ending the meeting around 11?Faith: Fine. And, uh, then students will take the placement tests from 11:15 until noon [OK.], followed by 20-minute break before lunch. [OK] And, immediately after lunch, we have reserved a campus shuttle to give students a 45-minute tour starting at 1:30. [Oh.OK] We want to show students around the university, including the union building, the library, and the student services building.Randall: Great. Now, how about the oral interviews?Faith: Well, we’re planning to start them at 2:15.Randall:Uh, well, teachers are going to be up to their ears in preparations, and they’ll be hard pressed to start then.Faith: OK, let’s get things rolling around 2:45.Randall: OK, here, let me jot that down. Uh, could you grab a pen off my desk?Faith: Right. Finding anything on your desk is like finding a needle in a haystack. [Oh, it’s not that bad.] Here, use mine.Randall:OK. And we’ll need 150 copies of this programme guide by then.Faith: Hey. That’s a tall order on such short notice! How about lending me a hand to put things together [OK.] by this afternoon so we don’t have to worry about them? Randall: OK. And I think the manager has given the green light to go ahead and use the more expensive paper and binding for the guides this time.Faith: OK. So the interviews will go from 2:45 until, let’s say, 4:30.[OK.] I hope we can wrap things up by 5.Randall: Great. I think the bottom line is to keep things running smoothly throughout the day.Faith: I agree. I’ll pass this schedule by the director for a final look.Task 5Receptionist: Good morning. Can I help you?Student: Yes, please. I wou ld want to have some information about the …er… the courses at Swan School.Receptionist: Is that a summer course you’re interested in?Student: Yes, yes, pleaseReceptionist: Yes, Fine. OK. Well, we have … er… short intensive full-time course during the summer.Student: Mm-mm. I would want to know the length of one course.Receptionist: Yes. Each course lasts for three weeks.Student: How many hours per week, please?Receptionist:Well, it’s about 23 hours a week. Usually four and a half days each week. Student: You must have a lot of students in the class, haven’t you?Receptionist: We have a lot of students in the school but in the classes only about between12 and 14 students.Student: 12 and 14. Could you please give me the dates of the first and the second course? Receptionist: Yes, certainly. The first course begins on the 3rd of July and lasts until the 20th of July and the second course is from the 24th of July until the 10th of August. Student: What about the fees per course?Receptionist:Yes, each… each course costs £150 plus V AT, which is 15 percent, and a £5 registration fee.Student: And deposit, please?Receptionist: Yes. For each course we need a deposit of £20 and the £5 registration fee. Student: Oh, thank you. Do we have to find our… our own accommodation? Receptionist: No, we can do that for you. We have a lady who arranges the accommodation for you with Oxford families.Student: How much does it cost?Receptionist: Well, you can choose to have bed and breakfast only which is £20 a week, or bed, breakfast and dinner which is about £27 a week.Student: £27. Thank you very much.Receptionist: You’re welcome.Task 6Every year, high school juniors and seniors from across the US take the Scholastic Aptitude Test (SAT 1).The SAT 1 is a three-hour exam that tests students math and verbal skills. Most universities will not accept students without this test. It is also used to help decide how much financial aid should be given to each student.Scores range from 200 to 800 for each part. There is a total of 1,600 points. The test is held every year from October to June. But seniors must take it before December in order to include their scores in their university applications. The average total score for an American high school student is around 1,000.A poor SAT score can prevent a student from going to a good university. Students who want to go to one of American’s best universities, such as Harvard or Yale, must score between 1,430 and 1,600.The test can be taken over and over again, but all the scores will appear on the students’ records. However, unlike Chinese universities, the score is not the only ting needed. American universities also look at a student’s subject grades, what they do outside of school, and their teachers’ recommendations.In addition to the SAT 1, some universities require high school students to take at least three SAT IIs. These one- hour exams can be taken in any subject, for example chemistry or French.Task 7Japanese students need 12 years of study before entering universities.They choose the places they want to go and apply before January of their final year. The university entrance exam is a standard nationwide test held every year in January. It provides tests for 31 subjects in six subject areas: Japanese language, geography and history, civics, math, science and a foreign language. All national and public universities, as well as some private ones make use of this exam. But many places also have their own tests in February or later, before the new school year starts in April.In order to pass the exam for the best universities such as the National University of Tokyo, many students attend special preparation schools on the top of their regular classes. These extra schools can last for one to two years between high school and university.Although every student has the chance of going to a Japanese university, only 50 percent of high school seniors actually choose further study.Task 8The School was opened in 1955 and is part of a non-profit-making educational foundation. Its 200 students, from 30-40 countries, work in large, attractive buildings set in extensive, beautiful gardens, within easy reach of the centre of Cambridge. The School has dining rooms, a library, video filming studio, language laboratories, listening and self-access study centers, computers, as well as facilities for tennis, table tennis, volleyball, basketball, badminton and football.General English classes are for students aged 17+. Complete beginners are not accepted. Students have classes for 21hours a week. Other subjects available within the General English timetable include English for Business and English Literature. The cost of tuition, materials and books per term is 1,130p. Accommodation is with local families. Lunch is provided in the School Monday to Friday. All other meals are taken with the family. There is a full range of social activities including excursions, discos and theatre-visits. The total cost of all non-tuition services is 670p per term. There are 3 terms of 10 weeks and summer courses of 9 weeks and 3 1/2 weeks.Task 9This school has a capacity of 220 students. It occupies a 19th century building in a quiet tree-filled square close to Victoria Station in central London.General courses, either in the morning or afternoons, comprise 15 50-minutes periods per week. We cater for a wide range of classes from beginners to advanced, enabling us to place students at the level indicated by the special entry test which all students take. There are usually no more than 14 students in a class. In addition to the 15 lessons, there are daily individual laboratory sessions and lectures on life in Britain at no extra cost.There are 8 classrooms, a multi-media learning centre, language lab, video, computer, lecture hall, can teen. We are open from January to December for course of 3 to 14 weeks. There is a special 2-week Easter Course and Refresher Courses for overseas teachers of English in summer. Fees are approximately 46p per week for general courses. Accommodation can be arranged with selected families with half board. There is a full social programme and regular excursions.Task 10This school, founded in 1953, is a non-profit making Charitable Trust. Situated in residential North Oxford, 3 km form the city centre, the College occupies a complex of purpose-built blocks and 14 large Victorian houses providing academic and residential accommodation. Facilities include an excellent library, video room, language labs, computer room, science labs, assembly hall and coffee bar.A particular benefit for the EFL student is the opportunity to live and study with native English speakers taking the 2-year International Baccalaureate course, or courses at university level.All students are encouraged to participate in social and extracurricular activities including sports, horse riding, drama, art, crafts, photography, films, concerts and excursions.Academic Year Courses (21hours per week) leading to all principal EFL examinations, concentrate on language with selected studies in Literature, Politics, History, Art History and Computing. Most students lives in college houses each supervised by a resident warden, but some prefer family accommodation.Task 11:Cindy Farrow is Andy and Kate Morgan’s American cousin. She is 18 years old. She comes from California, on the west coast of the USA. She lives with her parents in San Francisco. She is a student at Berkeley College where she is studying modern languages. She wants to be an interpreter when she leaves university.She has many interests and hobbies. She loves reading, swimming and surfing but her favorite hobby is white-water rafting on the Colorado River. She thinks it’s very exciting.At the moment Cindy is on her way to England to stay with the Morgans in Dover.。

现代大学英语听力1原文加答案Unit (3)

现代大学英语听力1原文加答案Unit (3)

Unit 5Task 1【答案】A.1) a, 2) aB.1) T, 2) F【原文】Stephen: Well, there you are, Mikko. “Passengers Only.” That’s you.Mikko: Mr. Johnson, thank you very much for bringing me to the airport.Stephen: A pleasure, old boy.Petros: He wants to make sure you leave, Mikko.Stephen: Petros! Don’t say that! It was a pleasure having him.Petros: Just teasing. See you at Christmas, Mikko.Mikko: Don’t forget to come, now. And don’t forget some warm clothes and don’t… Oh, no! I left my tennis racquet behind.Petros: Don’t worry. I’ll bring it at Christmas. Go on, Mikko. Your planes!Mikko: Mr. Johnson. Er…thank you. And…um…how do you say it? You’ve been very, very kind.And Mrs. Johnson. And Penny.Stephen: Thank you very much, Mikko. Nice of you to say so. Now on your way, old boy. You’ll miss your plane.Petros: Have a good flight. Bye.Task 2【答案】A.1) c, 2) b, 3) aB.1) F, 2) F【原文】Penny, Buck and Tony took off from Greenhill on June 23rd. They flew east and got to the Pacific in September. On the way there they saw a lot of interesting things.They traveled by camel in the desert. They met some Bedouin people there, and lived with themfor a few days.They made films and recordings of dances in the Himalaya Mountains, and on the island of Bali.They flew to the mountain of New Guinea and stayed in a village there.Now they are flying over the Pacific Ocean.Tony: Just look at those islands! RealSouthSea islands! They’re beautiful, aren’t they?Penny: But look over there.Buck: Oh dear! Bad weather.Tony: Does it often rain like this in the South Seas?Buck: Yes, it does.Penny: We can’t fly in this rain. It’s too dangerous. I’m going to land down there, near thatisland.Buck: Be careful, Penny.Penny: Of course. I’m always careful.Task 3【答案】A.1) b, 2) cB.1) T, 2) F, 3) F【原文】It is the year 1872, Phileas Fogg has just had lunch with some friends at his club in London.The six men sat down at a table and began to play cards. Stuart spoke after the game.“The world’s not very big,” he said. “We can go round it now in three months.”“In eighty days only,” said Phileas Fogg.“You can’t do it in eighty days,” replied Stuart.“I can,” said Fogg. “How much do you want to bet?”“Four thousand pounds,” Stuart said.“Only four thousand?” Fogg continued. “I have twenty thousand in the bank. I’ll bet all of it.”“Twenty thousand?” Smart asked in amazement.“I won’t lose,” said Fogg. “Eighty days is quite enough for me. But you must bet me twentythousand pounds too. Do you accept?”The five men talked together and th en answered him. “We accept,” they said. “When do youbegin the journey?”“There’s a train to Dover at a quarter to nine. I’ll take it.”“This evening?”“Yes, this evening,” Fogg answered.“Today is October 2nd. I’ll be back on December 21st at a quarter to nine. And now, let’s play agame of cards. Begin please, Mr. Stuart.”Task 4【答案】【原文】Happy Holidays are offering some good holiday bargains this year. How about an adventure holiday in Wales, for example? It costs£115 per person for a week’s holiday. For this price you get good food— three meals a day—and you sleep in mountain farmhouses. You must also pay for your journey to Wales, of course. If you and your family like sport, fresh air, and a healthy life, this would be a good holiday for you.Perhaps you would rather relax and lie in the sun all day. Then why don’t you go to sunnySpain? How about the Costa del Sol? Happy Holidays can take you there quite cheaply. It costs £250 for ten nights in a luxury hotel. This price includes the cost of the journey from London to Spain— by air, of course.If you like fresh air, a healthy life and plenty of sun, too, you could go sailing in Greece. You don’t need to be a good sailor. You can learn while you are on holiday. During the holiday you live on the boat. You must buy your own food, but food in Greece is quite cheap. And the holiday is not very expensive: £325 per person for two weeks, including the cost of air travel to and from Greece.Task 5【答案】A.1) F, 2) T, 3) T, 4) FB.1) c, 2) c, 3) b, 4) aC.family, 660, camping, 1499, first-class, swimming pool, night club【原文】Travel Agent: Good morning. Can I help you?Dad: Yes. Good morning. We saw your ad about cheap package trips.Travel Agent: Yes, of course. Well, these are the ones that are left. How many of you… er…?Dad: Just the four. My wife and I, and the two children.Child: Mum, can I sit over there and read my comic?Mum: No, you can’t. You want to help us choose, don’t you?Travel Agent: We’ve just got four family trips left. Er... ranging from £660 for this camping holiday on the French Riviera to £1,499 for a week in Corfu— that’s a first classhotel with swimming-pool, night club, you know, everything included. So,youknow, something to suit all tastes and pockets.Child: Dad, is it OK ifI...?Dad: No, it isn’t. Well, I must say, that last one certainly doesn’t suit my pocket. Doyou think you could… tell us what you get for those prices?Travel Agent: Certainly. Well, of course, there’s the flight, and transport to and from the air- port…er...accommodation, of course. Otherwise, well, it varies a bit. InCopenhagenall your meals are included, you know, because it’s a guest house, and…er...thischalet in Sardinia, for example, is basically self-catering, butthere are certainactivities like parties and…excursions, and…er...they’re included in the price.Dad: That last one sounds very interesting.Mum: What do you mean “interesting”? Who’s going to do all the cooking an d cleaning?I must say, I rather like the sound of the guest house.Child: Mum, ...Mum: No!Travel Agent: Well, actually, madam, there are extra catering facilities provided for all our self-catering holidays, should you need them.Child: Dad, ...Dad: Look, do us all a favour and go and sit over there and read your comic, will you?Travel Agent: These are all-inclusive family budget prices—I assure you they represent a substantial reduction on our normal prices. Er... down here you can see your datesfor departure and return—18th to 25th of July on all trips exceptCopenhagen,which is two days earlier, and, by the way, extremely good value formoney—£300 off the normal price at£899.Mum: Oh, really? You know, I’ve heard Copenhagen is such a beautiful city...Dad: Well, I don’t know. This camping one’s obviously out—I mean, it says here thatthey’ve got a casino and cinema and all that, but it sounds too much like hardworkfor me. But what about Sardinia? You know, £975 isn’t too expensive.Mum: Mmm... probably nicer for the kids, too—you know, warmer, and beaches and all that. Yes, let’s take it.Travel Agent: You won’t regret it, madam, I can assure you. Now, I wonder ifyou’d mind justgiving me a few particulars...Mum: Jimmy, what are you doing over there? I told you not to read your comic.Comeand have a look at the place we’re going to.Task 6【答案】1) a, 2) b, 3) c, 4) a, 5) b, 6) c【原文】Two people were having dinner in the Waverley restaurant. Here is their conversation: Man: Are you enjoying your meal?Woman: I thought the soup was very nice.Task 7【答案】A.1) b, 2) d, 3) aB.Seven. He lost his way in the forest. He burned his steak. He was woken up by the noises made by the people next to him and couldn’t go back to sleep. The pouring rain soaked his tent and he ended up sleeping in his small car. He had all the food stolen. His car was stuck in the mud and he had a flat tire on his way home.【原文】Friend: Hi, Tom. How was your camping trip last weekend?Torn: It was a disaster.Friend: A disaster? What was so bad?Tom: Well, I went camping. But you wouldn’t believe the bad luck I had.Friend: Yeah? What happened?Tom: Well, I went to Pine Hills. I got there Saturday afternoon. And the weather was really nice so I went for a hike.Friend: Yeah?Tom: You know that big forest there?Friend: Mm-hmm.Tom: I got lost. I had absolutely no idea where I was.Friend: Lost? That’s too bad. So what happened?Tom: Well, I finally found my way back to the campsite. It was like eight or eight-thirty atnight. I was really tired and hungry, so I was going to fix dinner. I’d brought along anice, juicy steak. I was cooking it over the campfire.Friend: That sounds good.Tom: Well, yeah, so I cooked it. Well, I tried to cook it. I really couldn’t see much, even witha flashlight. I burned the thing. Burned!Friend: Oh, you burned the steak?Tom: To a crisp. I could hardly eat it. But anyway, I really didn’t mind much because I wasso tired I just wanted to get some sleep. So I went to bed early. Then, about eleven o’clock, the people next to me turned on some music and started to have a party. Icouldn’t get back to sleep.Friend: Oh, you must have been angry.Tom: I was really angry! Finally, I went over and asked them to mm down the music. Thenabout two in the morning it started to rain. I mean it poured.Friend: Oh no!Tom: Bad enough that there was water in my tent. I had to sleep in the car.Friend: You slept in the car? But you drive that little...Tom: Yeah, I know. Not real comfortable. But that’s not all. I g ot up in the morning and Ifound my food was gone.Friend: What happened to it?Tom: Animals, I guess. Foxes or raccoons, probably. I had put the food in the tent, but theygot it.So I had no breakfast. By that time I figured the weekend was ruined anyway,so I decided to leave.Friend: Yeah.Tom: But my car was stuck. Man! There was so much rain that I was stuck in the mud. Ifinally found a ranger to help push me out.Friend: This doesn’t sound like a camping trip to be repeated.Tom: That’s for sure. Oh, an d to finish it off, I had a flat tire on the way home.Friend: A flat tire? Gee, I don’t imagine you’re going camping again for a while.Tom: Oh, I don’t know. I might go again next weekend.Friend: What?Tom; Hey, nobody could have that kind of bad luck two weeks in a row.Task 8【答案】1)It isbeautiful and peaceful. There is food—fish, coconut and wild bananas. There is fresh water, too.2) The civilized life is too complicated. And the traveling also makes Buck sick.3) The weather is bad. The food is dull. The fresh water is not enough. There are too many insects. He has nobody to talk to and no books to read.4) Some matches, some insecticide, some modern tools such as a good axe, a saw, a hammer and some nails and a radio.【原文】February 12thI’ve found it at last! This is the place I’ve been looking for—the island of my dreams! It’sbeautiful, and it has everything I need: food, fresh water, and peace. The lagoon is full of fish. Thereare coconut palms and wild bananas. There’s a nice little lake among th e hills. And no one lives onany of the islands around here.February 14thI’ve decided to stay here. I’m tired of traveling. I get seasick all the time. And I don’t really wantto get back to civilization. I want to get away from it all—to get back to nature. I want to live thesimple life—the kind of life that Bill’s forefathers used to live, without metal and machines andmoney. Ifthey could live like that, so can I. I’m sure I’m as clever as they were!February 17thIn a few minutes I’m going to go back to the boat. I’m going to fetch the things that Bill gave me.I’ll bring them back here. I’ll sail the boat out to sea. I’ll point it towards South America. Then I’lljump off and swim back here. If anyone finds the boat, they’ll think I fell into the water by accident.February 18thSo here I am—completely alone on my dream island. Now I’ll be able to do what I’ve alwayswanted to do: to get to know myself. Because I’ve never been really sure who I am. I’ve played toomany parts in my life—too many roles in films, and in real life, too. Now I have the chance todiscover the real Buck Westwood. All my life he’s been sleeping somewhere deep inside me—dreaming his “great dream”. Now it’s time to wake up, Buck. Be yourself at last!June 2ndThere was another storm today. It rained hard, and the wind blew away part of the roof. Everything in the house got wet. It’s not a very strong house. I’m not very good at building houses out oftrees and grass and leaves.There’s nothing to eat except coconuts and raw fish. I’m tired of coconuts, and I can’t cook thefish because the fire’s gone out. I wish I had some dry wood and some matches.June l0thI don’t feel very well. There isn’t enough clean water on this island, and there are too manyinsects. The house is full of ants and flies. They’re driving me mad! I wish I had something to killthem with!June 15thOh dear! I’ve only been on this island for a few months, but it feels like years already. There’snobody to talk to, and nothing to read. I wish I could get away from here. But how? I’ve been trying to build a boat, but I need some modern tools. I wish I had a good axe, a saw, a hammer and some nails.June 16thI must send a message for help. But how? That’s the problem! I wish I had a radio.Task 9【答案】A.1) c → e → a → b → d2) c → a → bB.1) F, 2) T, 3) T, 4) F【原文】Hello! I’m very pleased that you have decided to join one of our next London weekends. My name is Diana and I will be your resident guide during your stay in London. We shall arrive at the hotel at about 6:30 on Friday evening. Remember that we are staying at the Y Hotel in Great Russell Street—that’s on the corner of Tottenham Court Road.Aft er you’ve got to your room and you’ve had a chance to freshen up, I hope you’ll join me forshort walk through the West End of London. Leaving the hotel at 7:30 sharp I shall be strolling downCharring Cross Road, turning off through part of Soho to Piccadilly Circus, then through LeicesterSquare to finish up at Trafalgar Square. On the way we’ll pass a lot of the restaura nts, theatres andcinemas that you’ll be able to visit during your stay in the capital. , The walk should take about half an hour and when we get to Trafalgar square you’ll be free to go offand do whatever you like. Why not have a quick meal and then see one of the latest films in one ofthe many cinemas around Leicester Square.Ifyou haven’t stayed out too late on Friday night, please join me at 9:30 on Saturday morning fora walk through the great parks of London. We’ll take a short trip on the unde rground to LancasterGate and stroll across Hyde Park to the FamousSerpentineLake. Don’t forget to bring a piece of toastfrom breakfast with you to feed the ducks. From there we’ll cross over Hyde Park Corner, one of thebusiest traffic intersections in central London, and make our way down Constitution Hill in GreenPark to BuckinghamPalace. Ifwe can see the royal standard flying on top of the Palace, we’ll knowthat the queen is at home, but I don’t suppose we shall see her. From Buckingham Palace, we shallcr oss into the third Royal Park of St James’s—possibly the most beautiful of all, and we shall arrive atThe Horse Guards in plenty of time to see the ceremony of the Changing of the Guard which takesplace every morning at 11 o’clock.On Saturday afternoon you might like to visit The Houses of Parliament. Remember they are only open to visitors on Saturdays during Parliamentary sessions. Ifthere is some shopping you haveto do, now is the time to visit the Oxford Street stores, or ifyou feel like relaxing on a boat for a while,you can come with me on a trip down the River Thames to Greenwich. I’ll be at Westminster Pier nearthe Houses of Parliament at 2 o’clock in the afternoon, so join me then if you’d like to visit theMaritimeMuseum and the Old Observatory at Greenwich and see some of the great River Thames atthe same time.Saturday night is theatre night and we shall have tickets available for either a top musical or astraight play. I’ll give you details on Friday when you arrive and you’ll be able to choose w hich youwant to go to. On Sunday morning you’ll have the opportunity to visit the great street market ofLondon in Petticoat Lane. I’ll be leaving the hotel at 10:30. You can buy anything from a tin whistleto a tiara in Petticoat Lane, so come and join in t he fun. I’ll take you to a traditional London pub forlunch afterwards and then it will be time to get back to the hotel, pick up your luggage and begin your journey home.Task 10【答案】I hope I’ve give you a clear idea of the programme for your London weekend and before I finish let me just give you one or two pieces of advice, which should make your stay more enjoyable. First, please do remember to bring with you some comfortable shoes to wear. London isa big place and whatever you do, you’ll find yourself doing quite a lot of walking, so comfortable shoes are a real necessity. And secondly let me ask you to please look after your money. Keep it safe at all times and then you will avoid an unpleasant accident, which could spoil your whole weekend.。

现代大学英语听力听力原文及题目答案Unit(终审稿)

现代大学英语听力听力原文及题目答案Unit(终审稿)

现代大学英语听力听力原文及题目答案U n i t 公司内部档案编码:[OPPTR-OPPT28-OPPTL98-OPPNN08]I had two months until my new job began. It was like waiting an entire summer for school to start. I spent those two months talking to figure skating coaches and judges. I read boring rule books. I drove to the rinks where the skaters trained, and made notes about our conversations. I even took a lesson, which made some of the skaters laugh.Unit 6Task 1【答案】A.[d]—[b]—[a]—[e]—[c]B.a【原文】Laura usually leaves the offices of Quest Productions at about 5 o'clock, but last Monday she left at 5:30. She wanted to get home by 6:30 and she ran to the bus stop but she couldn't get on a bus. There were too many people and not enough buses. Laura was desperate to get home so she decided to go by tube.In the station she went to one of the automatic ticket machines but she didn't have enough change, so she had to join the queue at the ticket window. She bought her ticket and ranto the escalator. Laura went to the platform and waited for the tube. It arrived and the crowd moved forward.Laura was pushed into the train. It was almost full but she was given a seat by a man with a moustache. Laura thanked him and sat down. She started to read her newspaper. In the tunnel the train stopped suddenly and Laura was thrown to the floor together with the man with the moustache. Somebody screamed. The lights went out. It was quarter past 6 on a cold, wet December evening.Task 2【答案】A.1) a 2) b 3) d 4) cB.1) T 2) T 3) FC.wondered; television plays; exciting; every cigarette lighter; tape recorder; held in a certain way; the touch of a gold ring against the hand of; reveal; How wrong they were【原文】X was a secret agent. He had rented a furnished room in a provincial town not far from the public park and had been theretwo weeks. He was standing at the window looking out at thedull beds of geraniums, the park gates and the cold, uninviting statue of Queen Victoria that stood across the street from him, It was raining hard and the few people who passed by looked wet and miserable. X was miserable, too. How, he wondered, could anybody think there was anything interesting about the life of a secret agent He knew it was because people had seen so many television plays about glamorous spies that they thought the life of a secret agent was exciting. They were convinced that every cigarette lighter concealed a secret tape recorder; that a fountain pen held in a certain way would open a locked door, that the touch of a gold ring against the hand of an enemy would make him reveal all his secrets. How wrong they were! He looked round his room. The wallpaper was in the worst possible taste, the pictures horrible, the carpet worn, dirty and faded; and he was cold. This was the third Monday he had come to the window to look out. He prayed it would be the last.As if in answer to his prayer, a certain meeting he had been sent to investigate was about to take place. He took out his camera. Just beneath the statue two women had stopped to speak. He knew one of them, and it was she who pointed in hisdirection. The other woman looked up towards him and in thatbrief moment he photographed her.Task 3【答案】A.B.1) a 2) b 3) c 4) b 5) d【原文】Harry: Well, Robert, have you made up your mind yet what you want to do when you leave collegeNora: Oh Harry. Surely he's a bit young to decide on his career. He hasn't even got to college yet.Harry: Not at all, Nora. It's wisest to decide in good time.Look at me, for example. I really wanted to be a sailor,but now I spend my days sitting at a desk in an office.Yes, it's silly to train for the wrong job. And after all, Robert will be going to college soon.Nora: Now if I were a man I'd be a farmer. To see the crops growing--that's my idea of a good life.Harry: Yes, and to see the money rolling in is more important still.Robert: Well, that's not the way I look at it, Dad. It's thejob I care about, not the money.Harry: Maybe not; but you'll learn to care about the money too, when you've got a family to keep.Nora: And of course Peter — well, he's keen to be a racing driver, or else an explorer.Robert: Oh, Peter's not old enough to make up his mind about such things.Harry: You haven't answered my question yet, Robert. Whatwould you like to doNora: Are you sure you don't want to be a farmer, Robert Or a market gardenerRobert: No, I'm sorry Mum, but I don't want to at all. I'd rather be a civil engineer. I want to build roads andbridges.Harry: Not ships Isn't it better to be a shipbuilding engineer Robert: Look here, is it my career we're planning, or yoursHarry: All fight, all right, there's no need to lose your temper. But you'd better win that scholarship first.Task 4【答案】I. correspondents; columnistA. may not need eitherB. to go to places where events take place and write stories about themII. first; bigger; better; who will soon leave to work for other peopleIII. working hours; free time; work long hours to begin with 【原文】Here are some of the things a young man or woman should not do when he first asks an editor for a job:He should not tell the editor that he wants to be a foreign correspondent or a columnist. Very probably the editor does not need either. He wants a reporter who will go to such places as government offices and police stations and write a true story of what is happening there. Being a foreign correspondent or a columnist will come later.A young person should not tell tile editor that newspaper work is only the first step on the way to bigger and better jobs, such as those in government. The editor must take a lot of time and trouble teaching someone to be a good newspapermanor woman. He does not like the idea of teaching people who are soon going to leave him to work for someone else.A young journalist should accept the working hours andfree time the editor gives him. As a new journalist, it is very probable that he will work longer hours than others and work on weekends. The editor did the same when he was a young newspaperman with no experience. He expects a journalist to understand how things are on a newspaper.Task 5【答案】A.1) acd 2) abeB.1) she is the wrong sex 2) she wears the wrong clothes【原文】SYLVIA: We've got a new manager in our department.LARRY: Oh You hoped to get that job, didn't youSYLVIA: Yes, I did.LARRY: I'm sorry. That's too bad. Who is it Who got the job, I meanSYLVIA: Someone called Drexler. Carl Drexler. He's beenwith the company only two years. I've been here longer. And I know more about the job, too!LARRY: Hmm. Why do you think they gave it to him and not to you SYLVIA: Because I'm the wrong sex, of course !LARRY: You mean you didn't get the job because you're a womanSYLVIA: Yes, that was probably it! It isn't fair.LARRY: What sort of clothes does he wearSYLVTA: A dark suit. White shirt. A tie. WhyLARRY: Perhaps that had something to do with it.SYLVIA: You mean you think I didn't get the job because I come to work in jeans and a sweaterLARRY: It's possible, isn't itSYLVIA: Do you really think I should wear different clothes LARRY: Well. . . perhaps you should think about it.SYLVTA: Why should I wear a skirt Or a dressLARRY: I'm not saying you should. I'm saying you should think about it. That's all!SYLVIA: Why should I do that I'm good at my job! That's the only important thing!LARRY: Hmm. Perhaps it should be the only important thing. But it isn't. Not inthis company.Task 6【答案】A.B.1st speaker(bcd) 2nd speaker(ae)C.1) F 2) F【原文】Al: Is this the right line to file a claimBob: Yeah. It's the same line for everything. You just stand here and wait.Al: Oh. Is there always such a long lineBob: Every week. Sometimes longer. Is this your first time here Al: Yes.Bob: What happened Your plant closed downAl: No. I'm a car salesman, or, I was a car salesman. But we just aren't selling cars. It's the interest rates. Twoyears ago, I averaged ten new cars a month. Do you know how many cars I sold last month One. One car to a lady who had the cash. But the interest rates are up again. The boss let three of us go. How about youBob: I worked at a vacuum cleaner plant with about fifty workers. We put in a good day's work. But the machinery was getting old. As a matter of fact, the whole plant was old.So the management decided to build a new plant. You knowwhere In Singapore. The workers here made about sevendollars an hour, a couple of people made eight or nine anhour. You know how much they're paying the workers inSingapore $ an hour! Anyway, all fifty of us got laid off.Al: How long ago was thatBob: They closed down ten months ago.Al: Any luck finding another jobBob: Nothing. I have one, sometimes two, interviews a week.Last week I thought I had something. They liked myexperience with machines. But I never heard from them again. Al: At least you know something about machines. All I can dois talk.Bob: Maybe you'll talk yourself into another job. Good luck. I'll see you here next week.Al: I hope not. I hope I'll have something by then.Task 7【答案】A.1) F 2) F 3) T 4) F 5) T 6) FB.1) According to the first speaker, it is frustrating because the teacher cannot see clearly the results of his efforts.2) According to the second speaker, English language teaching is a good job, because it guarantees a stable income and regular working hours and means less pressure. He also likes the way elderly teacher are.【原文】Interviewer: Do you prefer what you're doing to teaching John Smith: Yes, one of the things I found a bit frustrating about teaching was that it was rather,very intangible than um, especially if you're teaching in England and most of the students know quite a lot of English before they arrive. They learn a lot of English outside the classroom, in pubs or coffee shops or other places, with thefamilies they're living with. It's very difficult to pin down how much they learn from your actual lesson, whereas in marketing um, again there are lots of areas that are gray rather than black or white, but there are quite a few other areas where one can see quite clearly the results of one's efforts.Interviewer: What did you do after you quit your job in advertisingSecond Man: In fact, I became a journalist and I worked as a freelance. I didn't have a full-time job with anynewspaper. I just had to contribute things as theycame along and 1 wrote for magazines, and I didquite a lot of broadcasting for the VOA. Well, thiswas in a way the opposite of advertising because Ienjoyed it a lot but I found it very hard to earnenough money to live on.Interviewer: And then you decided to be a teacherSecond Man: Well, and so I thought. Well, I must do something which produces an income that I can be sure of.While I was working as a journalist I had done anarticle for a magazine about the English languageteaching world and m fact I had come to the schoolwhere I now teach as a journalist and interviewed alot of the people. And I thought it seemed a verynice place and I thought that the classes I visitedhad a very, very nice feeling about them, and so Ithought, well, I'll see if they'll have me.Interviewer: Why do you prefer teaching to advertisingSecond Man: Well, partly because in teaching you work regular hours. It I advertising you just had to stay at theoffice until the work was finished [I see.] and itcould be three o'clock in the morning. [Oh, dean]Also you were very often made to work at weekends.Often some job would come up that was very importantand they said it had to be finished — it had to gointo the newspapers next week.Interviewer: So there was a lot mom pressure.Second Man: There was a lot more pressure in advertising. Also, the people I worked with when I was first inadvertising were young hopeful people like myself.By the end I was working with a lot of old peoplewho quite honestly were awful. And I kept looking atthem and saying, "Am I going to be like that" And Ithought if I am I'd better get out, whereas theEnglish language teachers I saw, who were olderpeople I thought, well, they seemed quite nice. AndI wouldn't mind being like that myself.Task 8【答案】The interview with Michale:The interview with Chris:【原文】Matthew: Michael, do you go out to workMichael:Not regularly, no. I... I used to; I used to have a job in a publishing company, but Idecided it wasn't really what I wanted to do and that whatI wanted to do wouldn't earn me much money, so I gave upworking and luckily I had a private income from my familyto support me and now I do the things I want to do. Someof them get paid like lecturing and teaching, and othersdon't.Matthew: What are the advantages of not having to go to work from nine till fiveMichael: Ah... there' re two advantages really. One is that if you feel tired you don't have to get up, and the other isthat you can spend your time doing things you want to dorather than being forced to do the same thing all the time.Matthew: But surely that's in a sense very self-indulgent and very lucky because most of us have to go out and earn our livings. Do you feel justified in having this privileged positionMichael: Yes, because I think I use it well. I do things whichI think are useful to people and the community and which Ienjoy doing.Matthew: Chris, what do you think the value of work isChris: Well, I think in our present-day society, for most people, work has very little value at all. Most of us go out to work for about eight to nine hours of our working day. We do things which are either totally futile andtotally useless or have very little justificationwhatsoever, and for most of us the only reason for working is that we need to keep ourselves alive, to pay forsomewhere to live, to pay to feed our children.Matthew: But surely people wouldn't know what to do if they didn't have to go to workChris: Well, again this raises the sort of two main aspects of work. Should we think of 'work only as a sort of bread-winning process, and this is very much the role it has in current society, or should we take a much widerperspective on work and think of all the possible sort of activities that human beings could be doing during the dayI think the sort of distinction currently is between say,someone who works in a car factory and who produces cars which are just adding to pollution, to over-consumption of vital resources, who is doing something which is veryharmful, both to our environment and to, probably society, to contrast his work with someone perhaps like a doctor, who I think in any society could be justified as doing a very valuable job and one which incidentally is satisfying to the person who is doing it.Matthew: What do you do Is your job just a breadwinning process or do you get some satisfaction out of doing it Chris: Well, in the job I do find that most of thesatisfaction is a mental one; it's coming to grips withthe problems of my subject and with the problems ofteaching in the University. Clearly this is the type ofsatisfaction that most people doing what we call inEngland "white-collar" jobs. This is quite different from the sort of craftsman, who is either working that hishands or with his skills on a machine, or from peopleperhaps who are using artistic skills, which are of aquite different character. Certainly it's becoming aphenomena that people who do "white-collar jobs during theday, who work with their minds to some extent, people whowork on computers, people who are office clerks, bankemployees, these people have fairly soul-destroying jobswhich nevertheless don't involve much physical effort,that they tend to come home and do "do-it-yourself"activities at home. They make cupboard, paint their houses, repair their cars, which somehow provide the sort ofphysical job satisfaction that they're denied in theirworking day.Task 9【答案】A.B.1) No major change. For some→“less paperwork”Some:→less working hoursOthers:→earn more money.2) Most adults→would go on working.Esp. young adults (18 to 24)→9 out of 10 would go on working 【原文】Are most workers today feeling bored and dissatisfied with their jobs It is often claimed that they are. Yet a study conducted by Parade magazine more than 20 years ago showed that people at that time felt the opposite.Parade asked questions of a representative sampling of adult Americans from coast to coast. The sampling included different sexes, age groups, and occupations.The interviewees were asked to make a choice from one of the following three to describe their feelings towards their work.A. Like their jobs.B. Dislike their jobs.C. Like their jobs in part,Results showed that 91 percent of the male interviewees and 84 percent of the females chose A, while only 5 percent men and 12 percent women interviewed chose B. The rest said thatthey liked their jobs in part and they comprised a very tow percentage.In all the three age groups — from 18 to 24, from 25 to 29 and 30 to 39 — those who liked theirjobs made up the majority. 70 percent, 88 percent and 92 percent respectively choose A. Those choosing B accounted for 20 percent, 9 percent and 8 percent of different age groups. And the rest, 6 percent, 3 percent and 0 percent respectively claimed that they only liked their jobs in part.The difference in responses among people with different occupations is small. Among the white-collar employees, those choosing A, B and C are 87 percent, 8 percent and 4 percent of the total. And for the blue-collar employees, 91 percent, 5 percent and 3 percent choose A, B and C respectively.It is interesting to note that there are few differences in attitude between men and women, professionals and factory workers. In each group, the largest number reported that they liked their jobs.Next, Parade asked, "If there were one thing you could change about your job, what would it be" It was expected that many would wish to make their jobs less boring, but very few gave this reply. No major changes were reported. Some wishedfor "less paperwork"; many would shorten their working hours,but others would like more hours in order to earn more money.No serious complaints were made.Most people have to work in order to live. But what would happen if someone had enough money to stop working Parade asked, "If you inherited a million dollars, would you go on working —either at your present job or something you liked better--or would you quit work" The answers showed that most adults would prefer to work, even if they didn't have to. This is true especially of the younger adults aged 18-24. Of these, nine out often said they would go on working, even if they suddenly became millionaires.Task 10【答案】A.B.1) F 2) TC.1) b 2) aD.1. She really enjoyed meeting new people.2. She had good qualifications in English and Maths.3. She did not mind hard work, even if it was not always pleasant.4. She liked living away form home.【原文】Officer: Come in, please take a seat. I'm the careers officer. You're Cathy, aren't youMother: That's right. This is Catherine Hunt, and I'm her mother.Officer: How do you do, Mrs. Hunt Hello, Catherine.Cathy: Hello. Pleased to meet you.Officer: And you'd like some advice about choosing a career- Mother: Yes, she would. Wouldn't you, CatherineCathy: Yes, please.Officer: Well, just let me ask a few questions to begin with. How old are you, CatherineMother: She's nineteen. Well, she's almost nineteen.Officer: And what qualifications have you gotMother: Well, qualifications from school, of course. Very goodresults she got. And she got certificates for ballet and for playing the piano.Officer: Is that what you're interested in, Catherine, dancing and musicCathy: Well...Mother: Ever since she was a little girl, she's been very keen on music and dancing. She ought tobe a music teacher or something. She's quite willing totrain for a few more years to get the right job, aren'tyou, CatherineCathy: Well, if it's a good idea.Mother: There you are, you see. She's a good girl really, a bit lazy and disorganized sometimes,but she's very bright. I'm sure the careers officerwill have lots of jobs for you.Officer: Well, I'm afraid it's not as easy as that. There are many young people these days who can'tfind the job they want.Mother: I told you, Catherine. I told you, you shouldn't wear that dress. You have to look smart toget a job these days.Officer: I think she looks very nice. Mrs. Hunt, will you come into the other office for a momentand look at some of the information we have there. I'msure you'd like to see how we can help young people. Mother: Yes, I'd love to. Mind you, I think Catherine would bea nice teacher. She could work with young children. She'dlike that. Or she could be a vet. She's always lookingafter sick animals.Officer: I'm afraid there's a lot of competition. You need very good results to be a vet. This way, Mrs. Hunt. Just wait a minute, Catherine.(The mother exits.)Officer: There are just one or two more things, Catherine. Cathy: Do call me Cathy.Officer: OK, Cathy. Are you really interested in being a vet Cathy: Not really. Anyway, I'm not bright enough. I'm reasonably intelligent, but I'm not brilliant. I'm afraid my mother is a bit over-optimistic.Officer: Yes, I guessed that. She's a bit overpowering, isn't she, your mumCathy: A bit. But she's very kind.Officer: I'm sure she is. So, you're interested in ballet and music, are youCathy: Not really. My mother sent me to lessons when I was six, so I'm quite good, I suppose. But I don't think I want to do that for the rest of my life, especially music. It's so lonely.Officer: What do you enjoy doingCathy: Well, I like playing tennis, and swimming. Oh, I went to France with the school choir last year. I really enjoyedthat. And I like talking to people. But I suppose you mean real interests — things that would help me to get a job Officer: No. I'm more interested in what you really want to do.You like talking to people, do youCathy: Oh yes, I really enjoy meeting new people.Officer: Do you think you would enjoy teachingCathy: No, no, I don't really. I was never very interested in school work, and I'd like to do something different.Anyway, there's a teacher training college very near us.It would be just like going to school again.Officer: So you don't want to go on trainingCathy: Oh, I wouldn't mind at all, not for something useful. I wondered about being a hairdresser — you meet lots ofpeople, and you learn to do something properly—but Idon't know. It doesn't seem very worthwhile.Officer: What about nursingCathy: Nursing In a hospital Oh, I couldn't do that, I'm not good enough.Officer: Yes, you are. You've got good qualifications in English and Maths. But it is very hard work.Cathy: Oh, I don't mind that.Officer: And it's not very pleasant sometimes.Cathy: That doesn't worry me either. Mum's right. I do look after sick animals. I looked after our dog when it was run over by a car. My mother was sick, but I didn't mind. Iwas too worried about the dog. Do you really think I could be a nurseOfficer: I think you could be a very good nurse. You'd have to leave home, of course.Cathy: I rather think I should enjoy that.Officer: Well, don't decide all at once. Here's someinformation about one or two other things which might suit you. Have a look through it before you make up your mind.Task 11【原文】I began my career during college, reporting on news stories at a Toronto radio station. The station’s program manager was also a professor who taught one of my classes. I convinced him that she needed a youth reporter because that year was International Youth Year. After graduation, I took a job as a television news reporter and later, news anchor. But sports reporting was something different, so I decided to try it. Figure skating was my first assignment.I had two months until my new job began. It was like waiting an entire summer for school to start. I spent those two months talking to figure skating coaches and judges. I read boring rule books. I drove to the rinks where the skaters trained, and made notes about our conversations. I even took a lesson, which made some of the skaters laugh.。

现代大学英语听力1 原文及答案(unit 1)

现代大学英语听力1 原文及答案(unit 1)

Unit 1 University LifeTaks 1ScriptOkay, Okay, let's begin. Hello, everyone. My name's Susan Hudson, and I'll be your teacher for this class, Intercultural Communication.Uh, to begin with, please take a look at the syllabus in front of you. As you all should know by now, this class meets on Tuesdays and Thursdays from 3:15 to 4:50. We will be meeting in this room for the first half of the course, but we will be using the research lab every other week on Thursday in Room 405 during the last two months of the class.Uh, this is the text for the class, Beyond Language. Unfortunately, the books haven't come in yet, but I was told that you should be able to purchase them at the bookstore the day after tomorrow. Again, as you see on your course outline, grading is determined by your performance on a midterm and final test, periodic quizzes, uh, a research project, and classroom participation.My office hours are from 1:00 to 2:00 on Wednesdays, and you can set up an appointment to meet with me at other times as well.KeyA. Answer the following questions.1)What are the name of the teacher and the name of the course?Key: Susan Hudson and Intercultural Communication.2)When and where will the class meet for the first half of the courseKey: The class will meet in the room they are in now and on Tuesdays and Thursdays from 3:15 to 4:50.3)Where can the students get the textbooks?Key: They can purchase the textbooks at the bookstore the day after tomorrow.4)When are the office hours?Key: The office hours are from 1:00 to 2:00 on Wednesdays.B. Complete the following sentences with what you hear on the tape.1)We will be meeting in this room for the first half of the course, but we will be using theresearch lab every other week on Thursday in Room 405 during the last two months of the class.2)Again, as you see on your course outline, grading is determined by your performance ona midterm and final test, periodic quizzes, uh, a research project, and classroomparticipation.Task 2ScriptLibrarian: Can I help you?Student: Yes. I am a bit confused. My sociology class is supposed to read a chapter in a book called Sociology and the Modern Age. According to the syllabus, the bookis in the library, but I haven't been able to find it.Librarian: Do you have your syllabus with you? May I see it?Student: Yes, uh... I put it in the front of my sociology notebook. Yes, here it is. Librarian: Let me see. Oh yes. Your professor has placed this book on reserve. That means you cannot find it on the shelves in its usual place. You need to go to a specialroom called the reserve room. It's down the hall and to the right.Student: I'm sorry—I still don't understand what you mean by on reserve.Librarian: You see, your professor wants everyone in the class to read the chapter. If one student removes the book from the library, it is likely that none of the otherstudents will have the opportunity to read it. So, your professor has insured thatall students have the opportunity to read it by placing it on reserve.Student: So, will I be able to find this book?Librarian: Yes, when a book is on reserve, a student can go to the reserve room and ask the reserve librarian for the book. The student can have the book for a few hours, andhe or she MUST read it in the library during that time. That way, the book stays inthe library, and all students have a chance to read it.Student: OK. Thank you. I understand now.Librarian: Will there be anything else?Student: No! I am on my way to the reserve room. Thanks again!KeyA. Answer the following questions.1)What's the student's problem?Key: According to the syllabus, the book he is looking for is in the library, but he couldn't find it.2)What's the meaning of "on reserve"?Key: That means the student cannot find the book on the shelves in its usual place.She/He needs to go to a special room called the reserve room.3)Why does the professor put the books on reserve?Key: The professor wants every one in the class to read the chapter. If one student removes the book from the library, it is likely that none of the other students willhave the opportunity to read it. So, the professor has insured that all students havethe opportunity to read it by placing it on reserve.B. Decide whether the statements are true (T) or false (F) according to the tape.1)The student has the syllabus in his hand all the time. [ F ]2)The reserve room is down the hall and to the right. [ T ]3)Once the students find the book on reserve, they can read it for a very long time. [ F ]Task 3ScriptHello and welcome to the university library. This taped tour will introduce you to our library facilities and operating hours.First of all, the library's collection of books, reference materials, and other resources are found on levels one to four of this building. Level one houses our humanities and map collections. On level two, you will find our circulation desk, current periodicals and journals, and our copy facilities. Our science and engineering sections can be found on level three. You can also find back issues of periodicals and journals older than six months on this level. Finally, group study rooms, our microfilm collection, and the multimedia center are located on level four.Undergraduate students can check out up to five books for two weeks. Graduate students can check out fifteen books for two months. Books can be renewed up to two times.There is a 50-cents- a-day late fee for overdue books up to a maximum of $ 15. Periodicals and reference books cannot be checked out.The library is open weekdays, 8:00 am to 10:00 pm, and on Saturdays from 9:00 am to 8:30 pm. The library is closed on Sundays.KeyA. Choose the best answer to complete each of the following sentences.1) Level one houses__________, ( c)a) current periodicals and journals b) our copy facilitiesc) our humanities and map collections d) our science and engineering sections2) Back issues of periodicals and journals older than six months are located on level ______. (c)a) one b) two c) three d) fourB. Fill in the blanks with what you hear on the tape.Undergraduate students can check out up to five books for two weeks. Graduate students can check out fifteen books for two months. Books can be renewed up to two times. There is a 50-cents- a-day late fee for overdue books up to a maximum of $15. Periodicals and reference books cannot be checked out.The library is open weekdays, 8:00 am to 10:00 pm. and on Saturdays from 9:00 am to 8:30 pm. The library is closed on Sundays.Task 4ScriptRandall: Hi Faith. Do you have a minute?Faith: Sure. What's up?Randall: Well, I just wanted to go over the schedule for Wednesday's orientation meeting to make sure everything is ready.Faith: Okay. Here's a copy of the tentative s chedule. [OK] Now, the registration starts at 8:30 and goes until 9:15. [All right] Then, the orientation meeting will commence at 9:30.Randall: Okay. Now, we had planned originally for the meeting to go until 10:30, but now we have someone from the international center coming to speak to the students onextracurricular activities, so how about ending the meeting around 11?Faith: Fine. And, uh, then students will take the placement tests from 11:15 until noon [OK.], followed by 20-minute break before lunch. [OK.] And, immediately after lunch, we have reserved a campus shuttle to give students a 45-minute tour starting at 1:30. [Oh. OK.] We want to show students around the university, including the union building, the library, and the student services building.Randall: Great. Now, how about the oral interviews?Faith: Well, we're planning to start them at 2:15.Randall: Uh, well, teachers are going to be up to their ears in preparations, and they'll be hard pressed to start then.Faith: OK, let's get things rolling around 2:45.Randall: OK, here, let me jot that down. Uh, could you grab a pen off my desk?Faith: Right. Finding anything on your desk is like finding a needle in a haystack. [Oh, it’s not that bad.] Here, use mine.Randall: OK. And we'll need 150 copies of this programme guide by then.Faith: Hey. That's a tall order on such short notice! How about lending me a hand to put things together [OK.] by this afternoon so we don't have to worry about them? Randall: OK. And I think the manager has given the green light to go ahead and use the more expensive paper and binding for the guides this time.Faith: OK. So the interviews will go from 2:45 until, let's say, 4:30. [OK] I hope we can wrap things up by 5.Randall: Great. I think the bottom line is to keep things running smoothly throughout the day. Faith: I agree. I'll pass this schedule by the director for a final look.KeyA. Complete the following schedule according to the dialogue.1) Why do they change the ending time of the orientation meeting?Key: Because now they have someone from the international center coming to speak to the students on extracurricular activities.2) What do they want the students to see during the shuttle tour?Key: They want to show students around the university, including the union building, the library, and the student services building.C. Complete the following sentences with what you hear on the tape.1)Uh, well, teachers are going to be up to their ears in preparations, and they'll be hardpressed to start then.2)Okay, here, let me jot that down. Uh, could you grab a pen off my desk?3)Finding anything on your desk is like finding a needle in a haystack.4)Great. I think the bottom line is to keep things running smoothly throughout the day.Task 5ScriptReceptionist: Good morning. Can I help you?Student: Yes, please. I would want to have some information about the... erm... the courses at Swan School.Receptionist: Is that a summer course you're interested in?Student: Yes. Yes, please.Receptionist: Yes. Fine. OK. Well, we have... erm... short intensive full-time courses during the summer.Student: Mm-mm. I would want to know the length of one course.Receptionist: Yes. Each course lasts for three weeks.Student: How many hours per week, please?Receptionist: Well, it's about 23 hours a week. Usually four and a half days each week.Student: You must have a lot of students in the class, haven't you?Receptionist: We have a lot of students in the school but in the classes only about between 12 and 14 students.Student: 12 and 14. Could you please give me the dates of the first and the second course?Receptionist: Yes, certainly. The first course begins on the 3rd of July and lasts until the 20th of July and the second course is from the 24th of July until the 10th of August.Student: What about the fees per course?Receptionist: Yes, each... each course costs £150 plus VAT, which is 15 percent, and a £5 registration fee.Student: And deposit, please?Receptionist: Yes. For each course we need a deposit of £20 and the £5 registration fee.Student: Oh thank you. Do we have to find our... our own accommodation? Receptionist: No, we can do that for you. We have a lady who arranges the accommodation for you with Oxford families.Student: How much does it cost?Receptionist: Well, you can choose to have bed and breakfast only which is £20 a week, or bed, breakfast and dinner which is about £27 a week.Student: £27. Thank you very much.Receptionist: You're welcome.KeyAnswer the following questions.1)What does the student want?Key: The student wants to have some information about the courses at Swan School.2)How long will a course last?Key: Each course lasts for three weeks.3)How many hours of classes are there in a week? And how many days?Key: It's about 23 hours a week. Usually four and a half days each week.4)What are the dates of the first and the second course?Key: The first course begins on the 3rd of July and lasts until the 20th of July and the second course is from the 24th of July until the 10th of August.5)What are the fees per course?Key: Each course costs £150 plus VAT, which is 15 percent, and a £5 registration fee.6)How much is the deposit for each course?Key: For each course the deposit is £20.7)Where will the students live?Key: A lady arranges the accommodation for the students with Oxford families.8)How much will the accommodation cost?Key: They can choose to have bed and breakfast only which is £20 a week, or bed, breakfast and dinner which is about £27 a week.Task 6ScriptEvery year, high school juniors and seniors from across the US take the Scholastic Aptitude Test (SAT I)The SAT I is a three-hour exam that tests students' math and verbal skills. Most universities will not accept students without this test. It is also used to help decide how much financial aid should be given to each student.Scores range from 200 to 800 for each part. There is a total of 1,600 points. The test is held every year from October to June. But seniors must take it before December in order to include their scores in their university applications. The average total score for an American high school student is around 1,000.A poor SAT score can prevent a student from going to a good university. Students who want to go to one of American's best universities, such as Harvard or Yale, must score between 1,430 and 1,600.The test can be taken over and over again, but all the scores will appear on the students' records. However, unlike Chinese universities, the score is not the only thing needed. American universities also look at a student's subject grades, what they do outside of school, and their teachers' recommendations.In addition to the SAT I, some universities require high school students to take at least three SATⅡs. These one-hour exams can be taken in any subject, for example chemistry or French.KeyA. Decide whether the statements are true (T) or false (F) according to the tape.1)Only the students who are going to graduate from high school will take the exam.[ F ]2)The SAT I is a three-hour exam that tests students' math and verbal skills. [ T ]3)The average total score for an American high school student is around 1,600. [ F ]B. Answer the following questions.1)How important is the test?Key: Most universities will not accept students without this test. It is also used to decide how much financial aid should be given to each student.2)How much should the score be for those who want to go to Harvard or Yale?Key: They must score between 1,430 and 1,600.3)What else will the American universities look at besides the score?Key: American universities also look at a student's subject grades, what they do outside of school, and their teachers' recommendations.4)What is the SAT II?Key: The SAT II is the one-hour exam that can be taken in any subject, for example chemistry or French.Task 7ScriptJapanese students need 12 years of study before entering universities.They choose the places they want to go and apply before January of their final year. The university entrance exam is a standard nationwide test held every year in January. It provides tests for 31 subjects in six subject areas: Japanese language, geography and history, civics, math, science and a foreign language. All national and public universities, as well as some private ones make use of this exam. But many places also have their own tests in February or later, before the new school year starts in April.In order to pass the exam for the best universities such as the National University of Tokyo, many students attend special preparation schools on top of their regular classes. These extra schools can last for one to two years between high school and university.Although every student has the chance of going to a Japanese university, only 50 percent of high school seniors actually choose further study.KeyA. Choose the best answer to each of the following questions.1)The Japanese students will apply for a university before ______ of their final year.(a)a) January b) February c) April d)July2)The university entrance exam provides tests for _______subjects in ____ subjectareas. (c)a) 30; 6 b) 30; 7 c) 31; 6 d)39;163)What kind of universities will make use of this exam? (d)a) All national universities. b) All public universitiesc) Some private universities. d) All of the above.4)How many high school seniors will choose further study? (c)a) All of them. b) More than halfc) Only half of them. d) Less than halfB. Answer the following questions.1) Why do many students attend the special preparation school?Key: Many students attend special preparation schools besides their regular classes, in order to pass the exam for the best universities such as the national University of Tokyo.2) How long do these extra schools last?Key: These extra schools can last for one to two years between high school and university.Task 8ScriptThe School was opened in 1955 and is part of a non-profit-making educational foundation. Its 200 students, from 30-40 countries, work in large, attractive buildings set in extensive, beautiful gardens, within easy reach of the centre of Cambridge. The School has dining rooms, a library, video filming studio, language laboratories, listening and self-access study centres, computres, as well as facilities for tennis, table tennis, volleyball, basketball, badminton and football.General English classes are for students aged 17+. Complete beginners are not accepted. Students have classes for 21 hours a week. Other subjects available within the General English timetable include English for Business and English Literature. The cost of tuition, materials and books per term is £1,130. Accommodation is with local families. Lunch is provided in the School Monday to Friday. All other meals are taken with the family. There is a full range of social activities including excursions, discos and theatre-visits. The total cost of all non-tuition services is £670 per term. There are 3 terms of 10 weeks and summer courses of 9 weeks and 3 1/2 weeks.KeyA. Answer the following questions.1) What kind of school is it?Key: It's a non-profit-making educational foundation.2) Do they accept complete beginners?Key: No, complete beginners are not accepted.3) What other subjects within the General English timetable do they have?Key: Other subjects available within the General English timetable include English for Business and English Literature.B. Complete the following sentences with what your hear on the tape.1)Its 200 students, from 30-40 countries, work in large, attractive buildings set inextensive, beautiful gardens, within easy reach of the centre of Cambridge.2)The School has dining rooms, a library, video filming studio, language laboratories,listening and self-access study centres, computers, as well as facilities for tennis, table tennis, volleyball, basketball, badminton and football.3)Students have classes for 21 hours a week.4)The cost of tuition, materials and books per term is £1,130.5)Lunch is provided in the School Monday to Friday. All other meals are taken with thefamily.6)The total cost of all non-tuition services is £670 per term. There are 3 terms of 10weeks and summer courses of 9 weeks and 3 1/2 weeks.Task 9ScriptThis school has a capacity of 220 students. It occupies a 19th century building in a quiet tree- filled square close to Victoria Station in central London.General courses, either in the mornings or afternoons, comprise 15 50-minute periods per week. We cater for a wide range of classes from beginners to advanced, enabling us to place students at the level indicated by the special entry test which all students take. There are usually no more than 14 students in a class. In addition to the 15 lessons, there are daily individual laboratory sessions and lectures on life in Britain at no extra cost.There are 8 classrooms, a multi-media learning centre, language laboratory, video, computer, lecture hall, canteen. We are open from January to December for courses of 3 to 14 weeks. There is a special 2-week Easter Course and Refresher Courses for overseas teachers of English in summer. Fees are approximately £46 per week for general courses. Accommodation can be arranged with selected families with half board. There is a full social programme and regular excursions.KeyA. Answer the following questions.1) How many students can this school have?Key: This school has a capacity of 220 students.2) Where is this school located?Key: It is located in a quiet tree-filled square close to Victoria Station in central London.3) What do they have besides the 15 lessons?Key: In addition to the 15 lessons, there are daily individual laboratory sessions and lectures on life in Britain at no extra cost.4) What kind of special courses do they have in summer?Key: There is a special 2-week Easter Course and Refresher Courses for overseas teachers of English in the summer.B. Decide whether the statements are true (T) or false (F) according to the tape.1) This school accepts only beginners. [ F ]2) Generally speaking there are 24 students in a class. [ F ]3) Accommodation can be arranged with selected families with half-board. [ T ]Task 10This school, founded in 1953, is a non-profit making Charitable Trust. Situated in residential North Oxford, 3 km from the city centre, the College occupies a complex of purpose-built blocks and 14 large Victorian houses providing academic and residential accommodation. Facilities include an excellent library, video room, language laboratories, computer room, science laboratories, assembly hall and coffee bar.A particular benefit for the EFL student is the opportunity to live and study with native English speakers taking the two-year International Baccalaureate course, or courses at university level.All students are encouraged to participate in social and extracurricular activities including sports, horse riding, drama, art, crafts, photography, films, concerts and excursions.Academic Year Courses (21 hours per week) leading to all principal EFL examinations, concentrate on language with selected studies in Literature, Politics, History, Art History, and Computing. Most students live in college houses each supervised by a resident warden, but some prefer family accommodation.KeyA. Answer the following questions.1) What kind of school is it?Key: This school, founded in 1953, is a non-profit making Charitable Trust.2) Where is the school?Key: It is situated in residential North Oxford, 3 km from the city centre.3) What is the benefit for the EFL student?Key: A particular benefit for the EFL student is the opportunity to live and study with native English speakers taking the two-year International Baccalaureate course, orcourses at university level.4) What extracurricular activities do they have?Key: Their extracurricular activities include sports, horse riding, drama, art, crafts, photography, films, concerts and excursions.B. Complete the following sentences with what you hear on the tape.1) Facilities include an excellent library, video room, language laboratories, computerroom, science laboratories, assembly hall and coffee bar.2) Most students live in college houses each supervised by a resident warden, but some prefer family accommodation.Task 11ScriptCindy Farrow is Andy and Kate Morgan's American cousin. She is 18 years old. She comes from California, on the west coast of the USA. She lives with her parents in San Francisco. She is a student at Berkeley College where she is studying modem languages. She wants to be an interpreter when she leaves university.She has many interests and hobbies. She loves reading, swimming and surfing but her favorite hobby is white-water rafting on the Colorado River. She thinks it's very exciting.At the moment Cindy is on her way to England to stay with the Morgans in Dover.。

现代大学英语听力1Unit1原文及答案(完整版)

现代大学英语听力1Unit1原文及答案(完整版)

Unit 1Task 1【答案】A.1) Susan Hudson and intercultural Communication2) The class will meet in the room they are in now and On Tuesday and Thursday from 3:15 to 4:50.3) They can purchase the textbook at the bookstore the day after tomorrow.4) The office hours are from 1:00 to 2:00 on Wednesdays.B.1) the first half, the research lab, Thursday, 405, the last two months2) outline, performance, quizzes, project, participation【原文】I’ll be your teacher Okay, okay, let’s begin. Hello, everyone. My name’s Susan Hudson andSusan Hudson and I’ll be your teacher for this class, Intercultural Communication.Uh, to begin with, please take a look at the syllabus in front of you. As you all should know by now, this class meets on Tuesdays from 3:15 to 4:50. We will be meeting in this room for the first half of the course, but we will be using the research lab every other week on Thursday in Room 405 during the last two months of the class.Uh, this is the text for the class, Beyond Language. Unfortunately, the books haven’t come in yet, but I was told that you should be able to purchase them at the bookstore the day after tomorrow. Again, as you see on your course outline, grading is determined by your performance on a midterm and final test, periodic quizzes, uh, a research project, and classroom participation.My office hours are from 1:00 to 2:00 on Wednesdays, and you can set up an appointment to meet with me at other times as well.Task 2【答案】A.1) According to the syllabus, the book he is looking for is in the library, but he couldn’t find it.2) That means the student cannot find the book on the shelves in its usual place. She/He needs to go to a special room called the reserve room.3) The professor wants everyone in the class to read the chapter. If one student removes the book from the library, it is likely that none of the other students will have the opportunity to read it. So, your professor has insured that all students have the opportunity to read it by placing it on reserve.B.1) F, 2) T, 3) F【原文】Librarian: Can I help you?Student: Yes. I am a bit confused. My sociology class is supposed to read a chapter in a book called Sociology and the Modern Age. According to the syllabus, the book is in thelibrary, but I haven’t been able to find it.Librarian: Do you have your syllabus with you? May I see it?Student: Yes, uh...I put it in the front of my sociology notebook. Yes, here it is.Librarian: Let me see. Oh yes. Your professor has placed this book on reserve. That means youcannot find it on the shelves in its usual place. You need to go to a special room calledthe reserve room. It’s down the hall and to the right.Student: I’m sorry — I still don’t understand what you mean by on reserve.Librarian: You see, your professor wants everyone in the class to read the chapter. If one student removes the book from the library, it is likely that none of the other students will havethe opportunity to read it. So, your professor has insured that all students have theopportunity to read it by placing it on reserve.Student: So, will I be able to find this book?Librarian: Yes, when a book is on reserve, a student can go to the reserve room and ask the reserve librarian for the book. The student can have the book for a few hours, and he or sheMUST read it in the library during that time. That way, the book stays in the library,and all students have a chance to read it.Student: OK. Thank you. I understand now.Librarian: Will there be anything else?Student: No! I am on my way to the reserve room. Thanks again!Task 3【答案】A.1) C, 2) CB.Undergraduate, five, two, Graduate, fifteen, two, 50, overdue, 15, cannot8:00 am, 10:00 pm, 9:00 am, 8:30 pm, Sundays【原文】Hello and welcome to the university library. This taped tour will introduce you to our library facilities and operating hours.First of all, the library’s collection of books, reference materials, and other resources are found on levels one to four of this building. Level one houses our humanities and map collections. On level two, you will find our circulation desk, current periodicals and journals, and our copy facilities. Our science and engineering sections can be found on level three. You can also find back issues of periodicals and journals older than six months on this level. Finally, group study rooms, our microfilm collection, and the multimedia center are located on level four.Undergraduate students can check out up to five books for two weeks. Graduate students can check out fifteen books for two months. Books can be renewed up to two times. There is a 50-cents-a-day late fee for overdue books up to a maximum of $15. Periodicals and reference books cannot be checked out.The library is open weekdays, 8:00 am to 10:00 pm, and on Saturdays from 9:00 am to 8:30 pm. The library is closed on Sundays.Task 4【答案】A.Activities Time to begin Time to finish registration 8:30 9:15the orientation meeting 9:30 around 11the placement tests 11:15 noon tour around the campus1:30 2:15 the oral interviews 2:45 4:30B.1) Because now they have someone from the international center coming to speak to the students on extracurricular activities.2) They want to show students around the university, including the union building, the library and the student services building.C.1) up to their ears, hard pressed2) jot, grab, off3) finding a needle in a haystack 4) bottom line, running【原文】Randall: Hi Faith. Do you have a minute?Faith: Sure. What’s up?Randall: Well, I just wanted to go over the schedule for Wednesday’s orientation meeting to make sure everything is ready.Faith: Okay. Here’s a copy of the tentative schedule. [Okay.] Now, the registration starts at 8:30and goes until 9:15. [All right.] Then, the orientation meeting will commence at 9:30.Randall: Okay. Now, we had planned originally for the meeting to go until 10:30, but now wehave someone from the international center coming to speak to the students on extracurricular activities, so how about ending the meeting around 11?Faith: Fine. And, uh, then students will take the placement tests from 11:15 until noon [OK.],followed by 20-minute break before lunch. [OK.] And, immediately after lunch, we have reserved a campus shuttle to give students a 45-minute tour starting at 1:30. [Oh. OK.] We want to show students around the university, including the union building, the library, and the student services building. Randall: Great. Now, how about the oral interviews?Faith: Well, we’re planning to start them at 2:15.Randall: Uh, well, teachers are going to be up to their ears in preparations, and th ey’ll be hardpressed to start then.Faith: Ok, let’s get things rolling around 2:45.Randall: Ok, here, let me jot that down. Uh, could you grab a pen off my desk?Faith: Right. Finding anything on your desk is like finding a needle in a haystack. [Oh, it ’s notthat bad.] Here, use mine.Randall: OK. And we’ll need 150 copies of this program guide by then.Faith: Hey. That’s a tall order on such short notice! How about lending me a hand to put thingstogether [OK.] by this afternoon so we don’t have to wor together [OK.] by this afternoon so we don’t have to worry about them? ry about them? Randall: OK. And I think the manager has given the green light to go ahead and use the more expensive paper and binding for the guides this time.Faith: OK. So the interviews will go from 2:45 until, let’s say, 4:30. [OK.] I hope we can wrapthings up by 5.Randall: Great. I think the bottom line is to keep things running smoothly throughout the day.Faith: I agree. I’ll pass this schedule by the director for a final look.Task 5【答案】1) The student wants to have some information about the courses at Swan School.2) Each course lasts for three weeks.3) It’s about 23 hours a week. Usually four and a half days each week.4) The first course begins on the 3rd of July and lasts until the 20th of July and the second courseis from the 24th of July until the 10th of August.150 plus VA A T, which is 15 percent, and a £5 registration fee.5) Each course costs £150 plus V6) For each course the deposit is £20.7) A lady arranges the accommodation for the students with Oxford families.8) They can choose to have bed and breakfast only which is £20 a week, or bed, breakfast anddinner which is about £27 a week.【原文】Receptionist: Good morning. Can I help you?Student: Y es, please. I would want to have some information about the…erm…the courses at Swan School.Receptionist: Is that a summer course you’re interested in?Student: Yes. Yes, please.-time courses during Receptionist: Y es. Fine. OK. Well, we have…erm…short intensive fullfull-timethe summer.Student: Mm-mm. I would want to know the length of one course.Receptionist: Yes. Each course lasts for three weeks.Student: How many hours per week, please?Receptionist: Well, it’s about 23 hours a week. Usually four and a half days each week.Student: You must have a lot of students in the class, haven’t you?Receptionist: We have a lot of students in the school but in the classes only about between 12 and 14 students.Student: 12 and 14. Could you please give me the dates of the first and the second course?Receptionist: Y es, certainly. The first course begins on the 3rd of July and lasts until the 20th of July and the second course is from the 24th of July until the 10th of August.Student: What about the fees per course?Receptionist: Y es, each…each course costs £150 plus V A T, which is 15 percent, and a £5 registration fee.Student: And deposit, please?Receptionist: Yes. For each course we need a deposit of £20 and the £5 registration fee.Student: Oh thank you. Do we have to find our…our own accommodation?Receptionist: No, we can do that for you. We have a lady who arranges the accommodation for you with Oxford families.Student: How much does it cost?Receptionist: Well, you can choose to have bed and break fast only which is £20 a week, or bed,breakfast and dinner which is about £27 a week.Student: £27. Thank you very much.Receptionist: You’re welcome.Task 6【答案】A.1) F, 2) T, 3) F B.1) Most universities will not accept students without this test. It is also used to decide how much financial aid should be given to each student.2) They must score between 1,430 and 1600.3) American universities also look at a student’s subject grades, what they do outside of school, and their teachers’ recommendations.4) The SAT II is the one-hour exam that can be taken in any subject, for example chemistry or French.【原文】Every year, high school juniors and seniors from across the US take the Scholastic Aptitude Test (SA T 1).The SAT 1 is a three-hour exam that tests students’ math and verbal skills. Most universities will not accept students without this test. It is also used to help decide how much financial aid should be given to each student.Scores range from 200 to 800 for each part. There is a total of 1,600 points. The test is held every year from October to June. But seniors must take it before December in order to include their scores in their university applications. The average total score for an American high school student is around 1,000.A poor SAT score can prevent a student from going to a good university. Students who want to go to one of America to go to one of America’s best universities, such as Harvard or Yale, must score between 1,430 and ’s best universities, such as Harvard or Yale, must score between 1,430 and 1,600.The test can be taken over and over again, but all the scores will appear on the students’ records. However, unlike Chinese universities, the score is not the only thing needed. American universities also look at a student’s subject grades, what they do outside of school, and their teachers’ recommendations.In addition to the SAT 1, some universities require high school students to take at least three SAT IIs. These one-hour exams can be taken in any subject, for example chemistry or French.Task 7【答案】A.1) a, 2) c, 3) d, 4)cB.1) Many students attend special preparation schools besides their regular classes, in order to pass the exam for the best universities such as the National University of Tokyo. 2) These extra schools can last for one to two years between high school and university.【原文】Japanese students need 12 years of study before entering universities.They choose the places they want to go and apply before January of their final year. The university entrance exam is a standard nationwide test held every year in January. It provides testsfor 31 subjects in six subject areas: Japanese language, geography and history, civics, math, science and a foreign language. All national and public universities, as well as some private ones make use of this exam. But many places also have their own tests in February or later, before the new school year starts in April.In order to pass the exam for the best universities such as the National University of Tokyo, many students attend special preparation schools on top of their regular classes. These extra schools can last for one to two years between high school and university.Although every student has the chance of going to a Japanese university, only 50 percent of high school seniors actually choose further study.Task 8【答案】A. 1) It’s a non 1) It’s a non-profit-making educational foundation. -profit-making educational foundation.2) No, complete beginners are not accepted.3) Other subjects available within the General English timetable include English for Business and English Literature.B.1) 200, 30-40, attractive, beautiful, with easy reach of2) dining rooms, a library, language laboratories, computers, tennis, volleyball, basketball, badminton, football.3) 214)£1,1305) Monday, Friday6)£670, 3, 10, 9, 3 ½【原文】The School was opened in 1955 and is part of a non-profit-making educational foundation. Its 200 students, from 30-40 countries, work in large, attractive buildings set in extensive, beautiful gardens, within easy reach of the centre of Cambridge, The School has dining rooms, a library, video filming studio, language laboratories, listening and self-access study centres, computers, as well as facilities for tennis, table tennis, volleyball, basketball, badminton and football.General English classes are for students aged 17+. Complete beginners are not accepted. Students have classes for 21 hours a week. Other subjects available within the General English timetable include English for Business and English Literature. The cost of tuition, materials and books per term is £1,130. Accommodation is with local families. Lunch is provided in the School Monday to Friday. All other meals are taken with the family. There is a full range of social activities including excursions, discos and theatre-visits. The total cost of all non-tuition services is £670 per term. There are 3 terms of 10 weeks and summer courses of 9 weeks and 3 1/2 weeks.Task 9【答案】A.1) This school has a capacity of 220 students.2) It is located in a quiet tree-filled square close to Victoria Station in central London.3) In addition to the 15 lessons, there are daily individual laboratory sessions and lectures on Life in Britain at no extra cost.4) There is a special 2-week Easter Course and Refresher Courses for overseas teachers and English in the summer.B.1) F, 2) F, 3) T【原文】This school has a capacity of 220 students. It occupies a 19th century building in a quiet tree- filled square close to Victoria Station in central London.General courses, either in the mornings or afternoons, comprise 15 50-minute periods per week. W e cater for a wide range of classes from beginners to advanced, enabling us to place students at the level indicated by the special entry test which all students take. There are usually no more than 14 students in a class. In addition to the 15 lessons, there are daily individual laboratory sessions and lectures on life in Britain at no extra costThere are 8 classrooms, a multi-media learning centre, language laboratory, video, computer, lecture hall, canteen. We are open from January to December for courses of 3 to 14 weeks. There is a special 2-week Easter Course and Refresher Courses for overseas teachers of English in summer. Fees are approximately£46 per week for general courses. Accommodation can be arranged with selected families with half board. There is a full social programme and regular excursions.Task 10【答案】A.1) This school, founded in 1953, is a non-profit making Charitable Trust.2) It is situated in residential North Oxford, 3 km from the city centre.3) A particular benefit for the EFL student is the opportunity to live and study with native English speakers taking the two-year International Baccalaureate course, or courses at university level. 4) Their extracurricular activities include sports, horse riding, drama, art, crafts, photography, films, concerts and excursions.B.1) an excellent library, video room, science laboratories, coffee bar2) college houses, a resident warden, family accommodation【原文】This school, founded in 1953, is a non-profit making Charitable Trust. Situated in residential North Oxford, 3 km from the city centre, the College occupies a complex of purpose-built blocks and 14 large Victorian houses providing academic and residential accommodation. Facilities include an excellent library, video room, language laboratories, computer room, science laboratories, assembly hall and coffee bar.A particular benefit for the EFL student is the opportunity to live and study with native English speakers taking the two-year International Baccalaureate course, or courses at university level.All students are encouraged to participate in social and extracurricular activities including sports, horse riding, drama, art, crafts, photography, films, concerts and excursions.Academic Y ear Courses (21 hours per week) leading to all principal EFL examinations, concentrate on language with selected studies in Literature, Politics, History, Art History, and Computing. Most students live in college houses each supervised by a resident warden, but some prefer family accommodation.Task 11【答案】Cindy Farrow is Andy and Kate Morgan’s American cousin. She is 18 years old. She comes from California, on the west coast of the USA. She lives with her parents in San Francisco. She is a student at Berkeley College where she is studying modern languages. She wants to be an interpreter when she leaves university.She has many interests and hobbies. She loves reading, swimming and surfing but her favorite hobby is white-favorite hobby is white-water rafting on the Colorado River. She thinks it’s very exciting.water rafting on the Colorado River. She thinks it’s very exciting.At the moment Cindy is on her way to England to stay with the Morgans in Dover.。

《现代大学英语听力2》听力原文及题目答案unit3

《现代大学英语听力2》听力原文及题目答案unit3

《现代大学英语听力2》听力原文及题目答案《现代大学英语听力2》听力原文及题目答案《现代大学英语听力2》听力原文及题目答案Unit 3Unit 3Task 1【答案】A.1) Stress on the job costs American companies as much as $150 billion a year in lower productivity, unnecessary employee sick leave, and higher medical costs.2) The most stressful professions are those that involve danger and extreme pressure and those that carry a lot of responsibility without much control.3) The best way to deal with stress is through relaxation, but sometimes the only answer is to fight back or walk away.B.1) Three-quarters2) psychologists, doctors3) nervousness, anger, frequent illness, forgetfulness, mental problems【原文】Stress on the job costs American companies as much as $150 billion a year in lower productivity, unnecessary employee sick leave, and higher medical costs. Three-quarters of the office workers today say they suffer from stress at work. Recently, psychologists and doctors have begun to study the problem more closely. They have discovered that the most stressful professions are those that involve danger, extreme pressure and those that carry a lot of responsibility without muchcontrol.The sign of stress range from nervousness, anger, and frequent illness to forgetfulness or even mental problems. The best way to deal with stress is through relaxation, but sometimes the only answer is to fight back or walk away.Task 2【答案】A.1)give in so easily to hijackers’ demandsa) threaten to blow up a plane, commit some other outageb) hold out against this kind of blackmail, always have terrorists, Start executingterrorists automaticallyc)be prepared to face the consequences of evil2)a) It’s the lesser of two evils. Terrorists have proven often enough that they really mean business.b)Innocent lives, threatening the innocent will achieve its ends.B.She implies that if the first speaker was one of the victims of terrorism, she would want the government to give in to the demands so that she wouldn’t die.【原文】Margaret: Governments give in so easily to hijackers’ demands. A hijacker only has to threaten to blow up a plane or commit some other outrage, and a government gives in to his demands.Valerie: Naturally. It’s the less er of the two evils. What government would risk innocent lives just to see if terrorists will really do what they threaten to do Terrorists have proven often enough that they really mean business. Margaret: Yes, but i f a government doesn’t hold out against this kind of blackmail,we will always have terrorists. Governments are afraid to punish these people. They almost always let them go free. Start executing terrorists automatically wherever they land, and terrorism will stop.Valerie: And what about the innocent lives that will be lost in the process Terrorism is based on the simple idea that threatening the innocent will achieve its ends.Margaret: You can’t get rid of evil without being prepared to face the consequences of evil.Valerie: So long as you’re not one of the victims!Task 3【答案】A.1)thirty-five, natural light, a small window, hot, airless, very noisy2) Mexico3) ought to, shouldn’tB.1)It is located in a narrow street with five-and six-storey buildings eightkilometers from downtown Los Angeles.2) This factory makes shirts and jeans3) She’s already been working for ten hours, but won’t stop for another two hours.4) She can’t complain about those things because she is an illegal immigrant.【原文】Eight kilometers from downtown Los Angeles there is a narrow street with five- and six-storey buildings. Inside one of these buildings there is a small factory making shirts and jeans. The women working in the factory sit close together, each with a small table, each with their own sewing machine. The women say nothing, and work hard. In one of the rooms there are thirty-five women. There is only a littlenatural light, and this comes from a small window in the roof. The room is hot, airless, and very noisy. On the left-hand side of the room there is a young girl sitting next to the wall. Every now and again she closes her eyes, and her fingers stop working. She's already been in her chair for ten hours, but she'll be here until the bell rings — and that won't be for another two hours. Her name is Maria, and she comes from Mexico. She won't complain about her work. She won't say that the working hours ought to be changed; she won't say that the working conditions shouldn't be permitted.Task 4【答案】A.Every year the British government publishes statistics about social trends. Their findings show definite patterns in the British way of life.1)marked differencesa)one hour more every day, three hours more every weekb) 1 percent, cleaning and ironing, keep household accounts, do repairs orimprovementsc)30 percent2)leisure activities, watching television, 20 hours a week, going for walks,Swimming, British womenB.Unlike the other couples, Carla has always kept her won accounts and Adrian has always done his own housework. Neither of them like watching television very much and they both like swimming.【原文】When Adrian Hutton and Carla Leone get married they will move into a new housethat they have bought. But what sort of life will they have What can they expect in modern Britain Every year the British government publishes statistics about social trends. Their findings show definite patterns in the British way of life.In most marriages there are some marked differences between husbands and wives. Working wives, for example, sleep (on average) one hour more a day than working husbands. Housewives, on the other hand, sleep only about three hours more every week than their working husbands. And what about housework The government survey showed that only 1% of men do the household chores — like cleaning and ironing. But they do usually keep household accounts and it is always men who do repairs or improvements in the house. 30% of all marriages end in divorce.The government survey also looked at leisure activities. They found that the two most popular leisure activities in Britain are watching television (the average family spends 20 hours a week in front of the TV set) and going for walks. Swimming is an especially popular activity among British women.Carla and Adrian's life, though, will probably be different from the average marriage. In the first place Carla has always kept her own accounts and Adrian has always done his own housework. Neither of them like watching television very much and they both like swimming.Task 5【答案】A.Topic: How a city in Japan solve the problem of garbage disposal.Supporting details: 160 million, every year, 10 percent, 10 percent, the rest, public cooperation1) garbage that can be easily burned, kitchen and garden trash2) electrical appliances, plastic tools, plastic toys3) are poisonous, cause pollution, batteries4) bottles and glass containers that can be recycled5) metal containers that can be recycled6) furniture and bicycledon different days, on request, fertilizer, to produce electricity, recycled, cleaned, repaired, resold cheaply, give awayB.1) The garbage will be taken to a center that looks like a clean new office buildingor hospital. Inside the center, special equipment is used to sort and process the garbage.2) Official from cities around the world visit Machida to see whether they can use some of these ideas and techniques to solve their own garbage disposal problems.【原文】Disposing of the garbage we produce every day is a major problem in cities around the world. In the United States, over 160 million tons of garbage are produce every year. Ten percent is recycled, ten percent is burned, and the rest is put in landfills. But finding land for new landfills is becoming more difficult.A city that has solved this problem in an unusual way is Machida, in Tokyo, Japan. They have developed a totally new approach to garbage disposal. The key to the operation is public cooperation. Families must divide their garbage into six categories:1. garbage that can be easily burned (that is, combustible garbage) such as kitchen and garden trash
;2. noncombustible garbage, such as small electrical appliances, plastic tools, and plastic toys
;3. products that are poisonous or that cause pollution, such as batteries and fluorescent lights
;4. bottles and glass containers that can be recycled
;5. metal containers that can be recycled
;6. large items, such as furniture and bicycles.The items in categories1 to 5 are collected on different days. Large items are only collected upon request. Then the garbage is taken to a center that looks like a clean new office building or hospital. Inside the center, special equipment is used to sort and process the garbage. Almost everything can be reused: garden or kitchen trash becomes fertilizer; combustible garbage is burned to produce electrical; metal containers and bottles are recycled; and old furniture, clothing, and other useful items are cleaned, repaired, and resold cheaply or given away. The work provides employment for handicapped person and gives them a chance to learn new skills.Nowadays, officials from cities around the world visit Machida to see whether they can use some of these ideas and techniques to solve their own garbage disposal problems.Task 6【答案】1) They were talking about Mrs. Carter.2) She was a tall, handsome woman who used to come into the shop at least twice a week.3) She lived alone in a large house on an old farm---about three miles from the shop.4) He was absolutely certain, otherwise he would never call the police. His evidence was this: First, he saw her do it; second, he found the things in her bag; third, she had done it before.5) Because two young people saw her. The shopkeeper believed that if they didn’t punish her, young people would think that stealing didn’t matter.6) The judge thought that it was difficult case from a humanitarian point of view. The excuses her found for her were: First, the woman was old and she livedalone---she was lonely. Second, she wasn’t poor---she was well-known for her generosity to charities and she didn’t need to steal. Te items were only worth a pound or two. Third, she pleaded not guilty and she didn’t know that she had done it.【原文】Shopkeeper: I knew Mrs. Carter very well. She was a tall, handsome woman who used to come into the shop at least twice a week. She lived alone in a largehouse on an old farm — about three miles from here. People ask me if Iam certain she did it. The answer is yes. I was absolutely certain,otherwise I would never have called the police. In the first place, I sawher do it. I watched her put the things into her bag and I watched her walkout of the store. In the second place, we found the things in her bag, andfinally, she had done it before. It wasn't the first time. I think she wasin such a confused state that she didn’t know what she was doing, but twoother people say her —two young people. We had to punish her, otherwiseyoung p eople would think that stealing didn’t matter.Judge: It was a difficult case from a humanitarian point of view. The woman was old and she lived alone —she was lonely. She wasn’t poor— she was well-known for her generosity to charities and she didn’t nee d to steal. The items were only worth a pound or two. She pleaded not guilty and said she didn’t know that she had done it. From the legal point of view the case was straightforward.The woman stole; she was caught and reported. There were witnesses. She had to be punished or else no one could be punished for stealing.Task 7【答案】A. not all modern cities are alike; modern city.1) a single high-density center, skyscrapers, motorways, as far as you can see2) the low-density multi-center city, a large collection of a number of small centers, shopping centers, factories, businesses, skyscrapersB.1) He thinks that the second type( the Los Angeles model) is more sensible.2) He considers it highly likely that the kind of city we know now will completely disappear.【原文】Interviewer: Would you say then that all modem cities are pretty much alike Urban Planner: Quite definitely not. There seem to be two types of modem city. In type one there is a single high-density centre, and that's where you'llfind the skyscrapers. This is surrounded by motorways. And all aroundthis centre, low-density suburbs stretch as far as you can see. Thisis like Houston, or Calgary, or Toronto. Interviewer: And the secondtypeUrban Planner: The other type is like Los Angeles — the low-density multi-centre city. As I'm sure you know Los Angeles is really a large collectionof a number of small centres, each with its shopping centres, factories,businesses, and skyscrapers scattered everywhere. In a way it's almostone enormous suburb.Interviewer: Do you. think one type is better than the otherUrban Planner: I think the Los Angeles model is more sensible.Interviewer: And so do you think Los Angeles is the city of the futureUrban Planner: Well, it is arguable that the next step after Los Angeles is the complete disappearance of the city, with no real centre, wherewell-designed forms of urban life-modem factories and office blockswhich are clean and quiet, and beautiful forms of rural life — thetrees and parks of suburbs, live side by side.Interviewer: So are you saying that the city as we know it will disappear...Task 8【答案】A.1) He thinks that this country’s problems all come from inflation, which is theresult of the Democrat’s careless spending.2) No, she doesn’t agree with Ned. She believes that the problem is unemployment.If the government cuts spending too much, people will fall into a vicious circle of more unemployment and fewer taxpayers to share the burden.3) She agrees with Barbara. She believes that unemployment is a big problem, especially in the big industrial cities. And the government isn’t doing very much to help the big industries out.4) He believes in the free market system rather than government regulation or protection. He thinks that without a lot of government interference everything will be okay.5) No, they think it’s bad for the weak, the poor and the unprotected/ it’s bad for the underprivileged.B.more and more money, come from somewhere, higher taxes and higher prices【原文】Ned: ... you know, I think this country's problems all come from inflation. That's the main cause of our troubles right now. And what's causing the inflation It's the reckless spending of the Democrats! Every year they spend more and more money, and that money has to come from somewhere. So we pay it in the form of higher taxes and higher prices on the goods we buy.Barbara: Well, I'm not sure that I agree with you. It seems to me that inflation is only one of our problems. What about unemployment If people don't havejobs because the government cuts spending too much, they can't buy things;and then you have a vicious circle of more unemployment and fewer taxpayersto share the burden.Ellen: You know, I think Barbara may have something there. Unemployment is a big problem, especially in the big industrial cities. The auto industry isfighting for its life right now, and the government isn't doing very muchto help it.Ned: Well, it's true that the auto industry is in a mess, but I don't think the answer is in government regulation or protection. I believe in the freemarket system —let the system work without a lot of government interference, and everything will be okay.Ellen: So the strong will win, and the weak will be defeated. Is that what you meanNed: Well, that's the way it goes. The survival of the fittest.Barbara: And too bad about the weak, the poor, the unprotected...Ned: Now you're getting emotional. You have to remain objective about these things. Let me give you an example of what I'm talking about...Task 9【答案】A.1) The problem is whether or not the inner city — the core of most urban areas —will manage to survive at all.2) They moved to the suburbs in search of fresh air, elbow room, and privacy.3) As a result, suburbs began to sprawl out across the countryside. Many cities beganto fall into disrepair. And many downtown areas existed for business only.4) The result was that urban centers declined even further and the suburbs expanded still more.5) Because from the decision of the Taylors and many other young couples, we cansee that some people may be tired of spending long hours commuting, and they may have begun to miss the advantages of culture and companionship provided by city life.B.1) F 2) T 3) F 4) F 5) T 6) TC.1) middle-class, tax money, neighborhoods2) Crime, public transportation3) housing construction costs, was allowed to, constructed【原文】A few years ago, Ann and Walter Taylor thought it might be time to move out of their New York City apartment to the suburbs. They had one young son and another child on the way. But after months of looking, they became discourage and decided to buy an old townhouse right in the middle of Brooklyn, which is a part of New York City. To their delight, they discovered that they weren’t the only young couple to have made such a decision. In fact, their entire area in Brooklyn had been settled by young families. And as a result, the neighborhood, which had been declining for years, was now being restored.Brooklyn isn’t the only city in the United States to experience this kind of renewal. So are Philadelphia and . And Charleston, South Carolina, has so successfully rebuilt its old central area that it now ranks as one of America’s most charming cities. The restoration of the old port city of Savannah, Georgia, is also living proof that downtown areas do not need to die. But encouraging as these developments may be, they are among the few bright spots in a mass of difficulties that today’s cities face. Indeed, their woes are so many that it is fair to ask whether or not the inner city the core of most urban areas will manage to surviveat all.In the 1940s, urban Americans began a mass move to the suburbs in search of fresh air, elbow room, and privacy. Suburbs began to sprawl out across the countryside. Since most of those making the move were middle-class, they took with them the tax money the cities needed to maintain the neighborhoods in which they had lived. The people left in the cities were often those who were too old or too poor to move. Thus, many cities began to fall into disrepair. Crime began to soar, and public transportation was neglected.( In the past sixty years San Francisco is the only city in the United States to have completed a new mass transit system.) Meanwhile, housing construction costs continued to rise higher and higher. Middle-class housing was allowed to decay, and little new housing was constructed.Eventually, many downtown areas existed for business only. During the day they would be filled with people working in offices, and at night they would be deserted. Given these circumstances, some business executives began asking, “Why bother with going downtown at all Why not move the offices to the suburbs so that we can live and work in the same area” Gradually, some of the larger companies began moving out of the cities, with the result that urban centers declined even further and the suburbs expanded still more. This movement of business to the suburbs is not confined to the United States. Businesses have also been moving to the suburbs in Stockholm, Sweden, in Bonn, Germany, and in Brussels, Belgium, as well.But it may well be that this movement to the suburbs has reached its peak. Some people may be tired of spending long hours commuting, and they may have begun to miss the advantages of culture and companionship provided by city life. Perhaps the decision made by the Taylors is a sign that people will return to the cities and begin to restore them. It begins to look as if suburban sprawl may not have been the answer to man’s need to create an ideal environment in which to live and work.Task 10【答案】A.1) 54, 20, 1980, £70,000.2) 30, 19803) a newspaper article, to research the market4) another few months, in April 1981, a 1,500 sq ft5) third, Canada, America, 20 percent, £1 million6) 20, 70, 3B.1) F 2) T 3) F 4)F 5)TC.1) He was deeply involved in the present job and rather enjoyed himself. He thoughtthe shop was his own little baby and thought it was fun to serve behind the counter.However, he also thought that there was a lot more hard work than he was used to; he was working over the weekend doing his books. He called his old job “boring trips to Manchester to sell vast quantities of PVC”.2) He thought that there are far more job satisfaction; and believed that he wasmaking money, rather than making money for other people.3) He was about to diversify into commercial distribution of imported anddomestically produced wine and wines he’s produced himself.【原文】William Rudd, 54, worked for ICI petrochemicals for 20 years until 1980 when he took early retirement with &70,000. He opened his own delicatessen and butcher's shop in Kensington and has just bought a second London shop.I knew about a year before I left that I was going to go, so I looked around for office jobs. I had one of those frustrating periods where I nearly got some jobsbut then I didn't. Actually it was a dinner party conversation which got me into the shop. A woman I knew said she was going to open a delicatessen and thought it sounded fun. So ! said, "Super, I'll come in with you." I'd always thought retailing would be amusing, after a lifetime of industrial selling.We found that the lease of the building stipulated we had to keep it as a butcher's and I added fish and cheese and things like that. I ended up spending far more than I'd ever intended.I didn't really do much research, except for fish, about which I knew nothing.I was clearly going to be the person standing behind the counter filleting, so I talked to one person who showed me a little, supplied me, and kept me under his wing for a little while. But it's quite easy to learn about fish; once you get used to gutting salmon you're on your way. Meat is more difficult; the skill is in the butchery, so I employ people for that. I had to learn about equipment by trial and error.I started in July — the worst time of the year for a shop like this — and the overdraft kept going up. That was rather frightening because there was no one between me and the bank manager. My reaction early on was that it was bound to come right. At the same time I was deeply involved and rather enjoying myself. It was my own little baby and it was fun to serve behind the counter —completely different from boring trips to Manchester to sell vast quantities of PVC. There was a lot more hard work than I was used to; I was working over the weekend doing my books.I remember my accountant saying to me when I was starting up, "What are you going to do for mental stimulation" In fact there's quite a lot of mental stimulation in the sheer terror of losingmoney: I couldn't have conceived of doing this 20 years ago. It was a great leap in the dark. I don'tknow if I'm brave or foolish, or a bit of both I suppose. But I do know that if I'dlistened to anyone I would never have done it.Les Shield, 30, a boiler technician, was made redundant from British Steel at Consett in 1980. 145'th Mike Heywood, a Consett transport manager made redundant at the same time, he started British Brewing Products, manufacturing beer kits and now diversifi2ing into wine production.I read a newspaper article about a company which had done quite well in home brew, and I started to research the market 18 months before the closure at Consett. By the time the steelworks were due to close I had a business plan ready. We bought some products which we had made for us and went out into the wilds of Yorkshire and Lancashire and sold them as a test. It took two months before we got any repeat business and that was a nail-biting period. It took another few months to fend premises and to get financial assistance from BSC industry and the bank. We went into production in April 1981 manufacturing home-brewing kits in a 1,500 sq ft factory.Let's face it, in this area, there wasn't a lot of choice. You could sit and vegetate and spend your redundancy money, you could move away and find new employment, or you could use your redundancy money to sink or swim.We're swimming. We're actually doing very well. I like being self-employed; there's far more job satisfaction. You know that at the end of the day you're getting the full value, personally, of the work you do. That's what you're in business for —to make money, rather than make money for other people. It was obviously a strain when I spent 5 days a week training, but after 18 months, we were able to afford our first salesman.I think my wife was happy for me to do what I've done. She accepted that there would be a certain amount of stress during the early days, but she probably realized that if I was successful the rewards would be there at the end of the day.We're now in our third factory since we started. We export our products to theRepublic of Ireland, Canada and America; exports account for 20 percent of production. Our turnover will exceed &1 million for the first time this year.We're about to diversify into commercial distribution of imported and domestically produced wine and wines we're producing ourselves. We employ 20 people at the moment but that will rise to 70 in the next 3 months.Task 11【原文】I could hear the guard blowing his whistle, so I ran onto the platform and upto the train. Luckily someone saw me coming, a door opened, and I jumped on while the train was mov ing out of the station. “Phew!” I thought. “That was hard work!” I was sure the other passengers could hear my heart beating; it was so loud, and I was in a cold sweat.After a while, I recovered, and had a look at the other passengers. The compartment was full, but I was the only one standing. The people in the carriage turned their eyes away as they noticed me looking at them; all except one, a beautiful woman sitting in the corner. I saw her watching me in the mirror.Automatically, I adjusted my tie. She had seen me running for the train: maybe this was my lucky day after all. I prepared to say hello.She spoke first, however. “Would you like my seat” she asked. “You look rather ill.” That was the day on which I realized I was getting middle-aged.。

《现代大学英语听力2》听力原文及题目答案Unit--6Word版

《现代大学英语听力2》听力原文及题目答案Unit--6Word版

I had two months until my new job began. It was like waiting an entire summer for school to start. I spent those two months talking to figure skating coaches and judges. I read boring rule books. I drove to the rinks where the skaters trained, and made notes about our conversations. I even took a lesson, which made some of the skaters laugh.Unit 6Task 1【答案】A.[d]—[b]—[a]—[e]—[c]B.a【原文】Laura usually leaves the offices of Quest Productions at about 5 o'clock, but last Monday she left at 5:30. She wanted to get home by 6:30 and she ran to the bus stop but she couldn't get on a bus. There were too many people and not enough buses. Laura was desperate to get home so she decided to go by tube.In the station she went to one of the automatic ticket machines but she didn't have enough change, so she had to join the queue at the ticket window. She bought her ticket and ran to the escalator. Laura went to the platform and waited for the tube. It arrived and the crowd moved forward.Laura was pushed into the train. It was almost full but she was given a seat by a man with a moustache. Laura thanked him and sat down. She started to read her newspaper. In the tunnel the train stopped suddenly and Laura was thrown to the floor together with the man with the moustache. Somebody screamed. The lights went out. It was quarter past 6 on a cold, wet December evening.Task 2【答案】A.1) a 2) b 3) d 4) cB.1) T 2) T 3) FC.wondered; television plays; exciting; every cigarette lighter; tape recorder; held in a certain way; the touch of a gold ring against the hand of; reveal; How wrong they were【原文】X was a secret agent. He had rented a furnished room in a provincial town not far from the public park and had been there two weeks. He was standing at the window looking out at the dull beds of geraniums, the park gates and the cold, uninviting statue of Queen Victoria that stood across the street from him, It was raining hard and the few people who passed by looked wet and miserable. X was miserable, too. How, he wondered, could anybody think there was anything interesting about the life of a secret agent? He knew it was because people had seen so many television plays about glamorous spies that they thought the life of a secret agent was exciting.They were convinced that every cigarette lighter concealed a secret tape recorder; that a fountain pen held in a certain way would open alocked door, that the touch of a gold ring against the hand of an enemy would make him reveal all his secrets. How wrong they were! He looked round his room. The wallpaper was in the worst possible taste, the pictures horrible, the carpet worn, dirty and faded; and he was cold. This was the third Monday he had come to the window to look out. He prayed it would be the last.As if in answer to his prayer, a certain meeting he had been sent to investigate was about to take place. He took out his camera. Just beneath the statue two women had stopped to speak. He knew one of them, and it was she who pointed in his direction. The other woman looked up towards him and in that brief moment he photographed her.Task 3【答案】B.1) a 2) b 3) c 4) b 5) d【原文】Harry: Well, Robert, have you made up your mind yet what you want to do when you leave college?Nora: Oh Harry. Surely he's a bit young to decide on his career. He hasn't even got to college yet.Harry: Not at all, Nora. It's wisest to decide in good time. Look at me, for example.I really wanted to be a sailor, but now I spend my days sitting at a desk inan office. Yes, it's silly to train for the wrong job. And after all, Robert will be going to college soon.Nora: Now if I were a man I'd be a farmer. To see the crops growing--that's my idea of a good life.Harry: Yes, and to see the money rolling in is more important still.Robert: Well, that's not the way I look at it, Dad. It's the job I care about, not the money.Harry: Maybe not; but you'll learn to care about the money too, when you've gota family to keep.Nora: And of course Peter — well, he's keen to be a racing driver, or else an explorer.Robert: Oh, Peter's not old enough to make up his mind about such things.Harry: You haven't answered my question yet, Robert. What would you like to do? Nora: Are you sure you don't want to be a farmer, Robert? Or a market gardener? Robert: No, I'm sorry Mum, but I don't want to at all. I'd rather be a civil engineer.I want to buildroads and bridges.Harry: Not ships? Isn't it better to be a shipbuilding engineer?Robert: Look here, is it my career we're planning, or yours?Harry: All fight, all right, there's no need to lose your temper. But you'd better win that scholarship first.Task 4【答案】I. correspondents; columnistA. may not need eitherB. to go to places where events take place and write stories about themII. first; bigger; better; who will soon leave to work for other peopleIII. working hours; free time; work long hours to begin with【原文】Here are some of the things a young man or woman should not do when he first asks an editor for a job:He should not tell the editor that he wants to be a foreign correspondent or a columnist. Very probably the editor does not need either. He wants a reporter who will go to such places as government offices and police stations and write a true story of what is happening there. Being a foreign correspondent or a columnist will come later.A young person should not tell tile editor that newspaper work is only the first step on the way to bigger and better jobs, such as those in government. The editor must take a lot of time and trouble teaching someone to be a good newspaperman or woman. He does not like the idea of teaching people who are soon going to leave him to work for someone else.A young journalist should accept the working hours and free time the editor gives him. As a new journalist, it is very probable that he will work longer hours than others and work on weekends. The editor did the same when he was a young newspaperman with no experience. He expects a journalist to understand how things are on a newspaper.Task 5【答案】A.1) acd 2) abeB.1) she is the wrong sex 2) she wears the wrong clothes【原文】SYLVIA: We've got a new manager in our department.LARRY: Oh? You hoped to get that job, didn't you?SYLVIA: Yes, I did.LARRY: I'm sorry. That's too bad. Who is it? Who got the job, I mean?SYLVIA: Someone called Drexler. Carl Drexler. He's been with the company onlytwo years. I've been here longer. And I know more about the job, too!LARRY: Hmm. Why do you think they gave it to him and not to you?SYLVIA: Because I'm the wrong sex, of course !LARRY: You mean you didn't get the job because you're a woman?SYLVIA: Yes, that was probably it! It isn't fair.LARRY: What sort of clothes does he wear?SYLVTA: A dark suit. White shirt. A tie. Why?LARRY: Perhaps that had something to do with it.SYLVIA: You mean you think I didn't get the job because I come to work in jeans and a sweater?LARRY: It's possible, isn't it?SYLVIA: Do you really think I should wear different clothes?LARRY: Well. . . perhaps you should think about it.SYLVTA: Why should I wear a skirt? Or a dress?LARRY: I'm not saying you should. I'm saying you should think about it. That's all!SYLVIA: Why should I do that? I'm good at my job! That's the only important thing!LARRY: Hmm. Perhaps it should be the only important thing. But it isn't. Not inthis company.Task 6【答案】B.1st speaker(bcd) 2nd speaker(ae)C.1) F 2) F【原文】Al: Is this the right line to file a claim?Bob: Yeah. It's the same line for everything. You just stand here and wait.Al: Oh. Is there always such a long line?Bob: Every week. Sometimes longer. Is this your first time here?Al: Yes.Bob: What happened? Your plant closed down?Al: No. I'm a car salesman, or, I was a car salesman. But we just aren't selling cars. It's the interest rates. Two years ago, I averaged ten new cars a month.Do you know how many carsI sold last month? One. One car to a lady who had the cash. But the interest ratesare up again. The boss let three of us go. How about you?Bob: I worked at a vacuum cleaner plant with about fifty workers. We put in a good day's work. But the machinery was getting old. As a matter of fact, the whole plant was old. So the management decided to build a new plant. You know where?In Singapore. The workers here made about seven dollars an hour, a couple of people made eight or nine an hour. You know how much they're paying the workers in Singapore? $2.50 an hour! Anyway, all fifty of us got laid off.Al: How long ago was that?Bob: They closed down ten months ago.Al: Any luck finding another job?Bob: Nothing. I have one, sometimes two, interviews a week. Last week I thought I had something. They liked my experience with machines. But I never heard from them again.Al: At least you know something about machines. All I can do is talk.Bob: Maybe you'll talk yourself into another job. Good luck. I'll see you here next week.Al: I hope not. I hope I'll have something by then.Task 7【答案】A.1) F 2) F 3) T 4) F 5) T 6) FB.1) According to the first speaker, it is frustrating because the teacher cannot see clearly the results of his efforts.2) According to the second speaker, English language teaching is a good job, because it guarantees a stable income and regular working hours and means less pressure. He also likes the way elderly teacher are.【原文】Interviewer: Do you prefer what you're doing to teaching?John Smith: Yes, one of the things I found a bit frustrating about teaching was that it was rather,very intangible than um, especially if you're teaching in England and most of the students know quite a lot of English before they arrive. They learn a lot of English outside the classroom, in pubs or coffee shops or other places, with the families they're living with. It's very difficult to pin down how much they learn from your actual lesson, whereas in marketing um, again there are lots of areas that are gray rather than black or white, but there are quite a few other areas where one can see quite clearly the results of one's efforts.Interviewer: What did you do after you quit your job in advertising?Second Man: In fact, I became a journalist and I worked as a freelance. I didn't have a full-time job with any newspaper. I just had to contribute thingsas they came along and 1wrote for magazines, and I did quite a lot of broadcasting for the VOA. Well, this was in a way the opposite of advertising because I enjoyed it a lot butI found it very hard to earn enough money to live on.Interviewer: And then you decided to be a teacher?Second Man: Well, and so I thought. Well, I must do something which produces an income that I can be sure of. While I was working as a journalist I had donean article for a magazine about the English language teaching world andm fact I had come to the school where I now teach as a journalist andinterviewed a lot of the people. And I thought it seemed a very nice placeand I thought that the classes I visited had a very, very nice feelingabout them, and so I thought, well, I'll see if they'll have me.Interviewer: Why do you prefer teaching to advertising?Second Man: Well, partly because in teaching you work regular hours. It I advertising you just had to stay at the office until the work was finished [I see.]and it could be three o'clock in the morning. [Oh, dean] Also you werevery often made to work at weekends. Often some job would come up thatwas very important and they said it had to be finished — it had to gointo the newspapers next week.Interviewer: So there was a lot mom pressure.Second Man: There was a lot more pressure in advertising. Also, the people I worked with when I was first in advertising were young hopeful people like myself.By the end I was working with a lot of old people who quite honestly wereawful. And I kept looking at them and saying, "Am I going to be like that?"And I thought if I am I'd better get out, whereas the English languageteachers I saw, who were older people I thought, well, they seemed quitenice. And I wouldn't mind being like that myself.Task 8【答案】The interview with Michale:【原文】Matthew: Michael, do you go out to work?Michael: Not regularly, no. I... I used to; I used to have a job in a publishing company, but Idecided it wasn't really what I wanted to do and that what I wanted to do wouldn't earn me much money, so I gave up working and luckily I had a private income from my family to support me and now I do the things I want to do. Some of them get paid like lecturing and teaching, and others don't.Matthew: What are the advantages of not having to go to work from nine till five? Michael: Ah... there' re two advantages really. One is that if you feel tired you don't have to get up, and the other is that you can spend your time doing things you want to do rather than being forced to do the same thing all the time. Matthew: But surely that's in a sense very self-indulgent and very lucky because most of us have to go out and earn our livings. Do you feel justified in having this privileged position?Michael: Yes, because I think I use it well. I do things which I think are useful to people and the community and which I enjoy doing.Matthew: Chris, what do you think the value of work is?Chris: Well, I think in our present-day society, for most people, work has very little value at all. Most of us go out to work for about eight to nine hours of our working day. We do things which are either totally futile and totally useless or have very little justification whatsoever, and for most of us the only reason for working is that we need to keep ourselves alive, to pay for somewhere to live, to pay to feed our children.Matthew: But surely people wouldn't know what to do if they didn't have to go to work?Chris: Well, again this raises the sort of two main aspects of work. Should we think of 'work only as a sort of bread-winning process, and this is very much the role it has in current society, or should we take a much wider perspective on work and think of all the possible sort of activities that human beingscould be doing during the day? I think the sort of distinction currently is between say, someone who works in a car factory and who produces cars which are just adding to pollution, to over-consumption of vital resources, who is doing something which is very harmful, both to our environment and to, probably society, to contrast his work with someone perhaps like a doctor, who I think in any society could be justified as doing a very valuable job and one which incidentally is satisfying to the person who is doing it.Matthew: What do you do? Is your job just a breadwinning process or do you get some satisfaction out of doing it?Chris: Well, in the job I do find that most of the satisfaction is a mental one;it's coming to grips with the problems of my subject and with the problems of teaching in the University. Clearly this is the type of satisfaction that most people doing what we call in England "white-collar" jobs. This is quite different from the sort of craftsman, who is either working that his hands or with his skills on a machine, or from people perhaps who are using artistic skills, which are of a quite different character. Certainly it's becoming a phenomena that people who do "white-collar jobs during the day, who work with their minds to some extent, people who work on computers, people who are office clerks, bank employees, these people have fairly soul-destroying jobs which nevertheless don't involve much physical effort, that they tend to come home and do "do-it-yourself" activities at home. They make cupboard, paint their houses, repair their cars, which somehow provide the sort of physical job satisfaction that they're denied in their working day.Task 9【答案】A.B.1) No major change. For some→“less paperwork”Some:→less working hoursOthers:→earn more money.2) Most adults→would go on working.Esp. young adults (18 to 24)→9 out of 10 would go on working【原文】Are most workers today feeling bored and dissatisfied with their jobs? It is often claimed that they are. Yet a study conducted by Parade magazine more than 20 years ago showed that people at that time felt the opposite.Parade asked questions of a representative sampling of adult Americans from coast to coast. The sampling included different sexes, age groups, and occupations. The interviewees were asked to make a choice from one of the following three to describe their feelings towards their work.A. Like their jobs.B. Dislike their jobs.C. Like their jobs in part,Results showed that 91 percent of the male interviewees and 84 percent of the females chose A, while only 5 percent men and 12 percent women interviewed chose B. The rest said that they liked their jobs in part and they comprised a very tow percentage.In all the three age groups — from 18 to 24, from 25 to 29 and 30 to 39 —those who liked theirjobs made up the majority. 70 percent, 88 percent and 92 percent respectively choose A. Those choosing B accounted for 20 percent, 9 percent and 8 percent of different age groups. And the rest, 6 percent, 3 percent and 0 percent respectively claimed that they only liked their jobs in part.The difference in responses among people with different occupations is small. Among the white-collar employees, those choosing A, B and C are 87 percent, 8 percent and 4 percent of the total. And for the blue-collar employees, 91 percent, 5 percent and 3 percent choose A, B and C respectively.It is interesting to note that there are few differences in attitude between men and women, professionals and factory workers. In each group, the largest number reported that they liked their jobs.Next, Parade asked, "If there were one thing you could change about your job, what would it be?" It was expected that many would wish to make their jobs less boring, but very few gave this reply. No major changes were reported. Some wished for "less paperwork"; many would shorten their working hours, but others would like more hours in order to earn more money. No serious complaints were made.Most people have to work in order to live. But what would happen if someone had enough money to stop working? Parade asked, "If you inherited a million dollars, would you go on working — either at your present job or something you liked better--or would you quit work?" The answers showed that most adults would prefer to work, even if they didn't have to. This is true especially of the younger adults aged 18-24. Of these, nine out often said they would go on working, even if they suddenly became millionaires.Task 10【答案】B.1) F 2) TC.1) b 2) aD.1. She really enjoyed meeting new people.2. She had good qualifications in English and Maths.3. She did not mind hard work, even if it was not always pleasant.4. She liked living away form home.【原文】Officer: Come in, please take a seat. I'm the careers officer. You're Cathy, aren't you?Mother: That's right. This is Catherine Hunt, and I'm her mother.Officer: How do you do, Mrs. Hunt? Hello, Catherine.Cathy: Hello. Pleased to meet you.Officer: And you'd like some advice about choosing a career?-Mother: Yes, she would. Wouldn't you, Catherine?Cathy: Yes, please.Officer: Well, just let me ask a few questions to begin with. How old are you, Catherine?Mother: She's nineteen. Well, she's almost nineteen.Officer: And what qualifications have you got?Mother: Well, qualifications from school, of course. Very good results she got. And she got certificates for ballet and for playing the piano.Officer: Is that what you're interested in, Catherine, dancing and music? Cathy: Well...Mother: Ever since she was a little girl, she's been very keen on music and dancing. She ought tobe a music teacher or something. She's quite willing to train for a few more years to get the right job, aren't you, Catherine?Cathy: Well, if it's a good idea.Mother: There you are, you see. She's a good girl really, a bit lazy and disorganized sometimes,but she's very bright. I'm sure the careers officer will have lots of jobs for you.Officer: Well, I'm afraid it's not as easy as that. There are many young people these days who can'tfind the job they want.Mother: I told you, Catherine. I told you, you shouldn't wear that dress. You have to look smart toget a job these days.Officer: I think she looks very nice. Mrs. Hunt, will you come into the other office for a momentand look at some of the information we have there. I'm sure you'd like to see how we can help young people.Mother: Yes, I'd love to. Mind you, I think Catherine would be a nice teacher. She could work with young children. She'd like that. Or she could be a vet. She's always looking after sick animals.Officer: I'm afraid there's a lot of competition. You need very good results to bea vet. This way, Mrs. Hunt. Just wait a minute, Catherine.(The mother exits.)Officer: There are just one or two more things, Catherine.Cathy: Do call me Cathy.Officer: OK, Cathy. Are you really interested in being a vet?Cathy: Not really. Anyway, I'm not bright enough. I'm reasonably intelligent, but I'm not brilliant. I'm afraid my mother is a bit over-optimistic.Officer: Yes, I guessed that. She's a bit overpowering, isn't she, your mum? Cathy: A bit. But she's very kind.Officer: I'm sure she is. So, you're interested in ballet and music, are you? Cathy: Not really. My mother sent me to lessons when I was six, so I'm quite good,I suppose. But I don't think I want to do that for the rest of my life, especiallymusic. It's so lonely.Officer: What do you enjoy doing?Cathy: Well, I like playing tennis, and swimming. Oh, I went to France with the school choir last year. I really enjoyed that. And I like talking to people. But I suppose you mean real interests — things that would help me to get a job? Officer: No. I'm more interested in what you really want to do. You like talking to people, do you?Cathy: Oh yes, I really enjoy meeting new people.Officer: Do you think you would enjoy teaching?Cathy: No, no, I don't really. I was never very interested in school work, and I'd like to do something different. Anyway, there's a teacher training college very near us. It would be just like going to school again.Officer: So you don't want to go on training?Cathy: Oh, I wouldn't mind at all, not for something useful. I wondered about beinga hairdresser — you meet lots of people, and you learn to do somethingproperly—but I don't know. It doesn't seem very worthwhile.Officer: What about nursing?Cathy: Nursing? In a hospital? Oh, I couldn't do that, I'm not good enough. Officer: Yes, you are. You've got good qualifications in English and Maths. But it is very hard work.Cathy: Oh, I don't mind that.Officer: And it's not very pleasant sometimes.Cathy: That doesn't worry me either. Mum's right. I do look after sick animals. Ilooked after our dog when it was run over by a car. My mother was sick, but I didn't mind. I was too worried about the dog. Do you really think I could be a nurse?Officer: I think you could be a very good nurse. You'd have to leave home, of course. Cathy: I rather think I should enjoy that.Officer: Well, don't decide all at once. Here's some information about one or two other things which might suit you. Have a look through it before you make up your mind.Task 11【原文】I began my career during college, reporting on news stories at a Toronto radio station. The station’s program manager was also a professor who taught one of my classes. I convinced him that she needed a youth reporter because that year was International Youth Year. After graduation, I took a job as a television news reporter and later, news anchor. But sports reporting was something different, so I decided to try it. Figure skating was my first assignment.I had two months until my new job began. It was like waiting an entire summer for school to start. I spent those two months talking to figure skating coaches and judges. I read boring rule books. I drove to the rinks where the skaters trained, and made notes about our conversations. I even took a lesson, which made some of the skaters laugh.(注:可编辑下载,若有不当之处,请指正,谢谢!)。

现代大学英语听力1_课堂听力unit_10

现代大学英语听力1_课堂听力unit_10

Unit 10Task 1【答案】million, 170,000, three, exercise, unhealthy, salt, sugar, vegetables, habits【原文】Heart disease kills more than a million people in the world every year. In Britain alone 170,000 die from the disease annually. There are three main reasons for this: smoking, a bad diet, and not taking enough exercise. Many people travel to work by car, bus or train and then sit down at work all day! The food they eat is unhealthy and they eat too much. In a typical British dish of sausages, chips and beans there is too much salt and too much sugar — an important ingredient in tinned food — and there are not enough vegetables. And there is not enough fiber in most meals. There are too many deaths from heart disease. We can reduce that number, but we have to change our habits.Task 2【答案】A.1) 60, 400, 25, 100, sugar, flour, powdered2) 45-55, 180, with【原文】Pear and Ginger Upside-down PuddingIngredients60ml golden syrup 400g canned pears (drain and retain juice)25 g glace cherries 100g margarine100g sugar 2 eggs150g flour l 0ml powdered gingera little milkMethodCooking time: 45-55 minutesOven: 180℃This is a popular favourite with the family. Grease a 20 cm round cake tin. Heat the syrup and pour into the tin and cover the base. Arrange the pears and glace cherries in the syrup. Cream the margarine and sugar together until light and fluffy. Beat in the eggs and finally stir in the flour and ginger. If the mixture is stiff add a little milk. Pour the mixture over the fruit and cook until golden brown and firm to the touch. Turn the pudding out onto a serving dish.Task 3【答案】A. 1) F, 2) TB.1) Their idea of a good meal is a hamburger, served with ketchup and French fries.2) Because they often have little space for tables and chairs. Many people buy their hamburgers and take them home to eat, or eat them in their cars.【原文】The younger members of most American families don’t like foreign food. They like hamburgers. Their idea of a good meal is a hamburger, served with ketchup and French fried potatoes, which are called French fries. French fries are not considered foreign; most American children and teenagers love to eat them any time of the day or night.Millions of hamburgers and French fries are eaten every year. Thousands of roadside restaurants prepare and sell them. These are not really restaurants in the usual sense; they often have little space for tables and chairs. Many people buy their hamburgers and take them home to eat, or eat them in their cars.Sometimes it is not necessary to go inside in order to buy the hamburgers. They are ordered through a window in the restaurant and then are handed out through the window to the waiting customer. Sometimes the customer does not even have to get out of his car.When an American family travels abroad, this is almost always the custom that the younger members of the family miss most.Task 4【答案】1) No. They don’t like anything but hamburger.2) Ground sirloin is more expensive than ground chuck, but it has less fat.3) She mixes the salt and pepper and onions with ground beef.4) A patty is a flattened ball.5) Because it will make the hamburger tough. They will be hard and tough.6) Rare, medium, or well-done.【原文】Mrs. Wong: Have you tried cooking Chinese fried rice?Mrs. Adams: Yes, I made it last Saturday, just the way you told me to make it.Mrs. Wong: How did it taste?Mrs. Adams: Not as good as yours, but we all liked it. All except my teenagers. They don’t like anything but hamburgers.Mrs. Wong: Oh, hamburgers! My children keep asking for hamburgers. I get so tired of hearing about hamburgers!Mrs. Adams: I know what you mean. I get tired of making them.Mrs. Wong: How do you make them? I suppose 1 should learn how.Mrs. Adams: They’re very simple, compared to your food.Mrs. Wong: What kind of meat do you buy?Mrs. Adams: Some kind of ground beef. I usually ask for either ground sirloin or ground round steak. It’s more expensive than ground chuck, but it has less fat.Mrs. Wong: How much do you buy?Mrs. Adams: A pound makes four big hamburgers.Mrs. Wong: What do you mix with the ground beef?Mrs. Adams: I just add a little salt, some pepper, and sometimes a little chopped onion. Some people don’t like it with onions, but 1 do.Mrs. Wong: So you mix the salt and pepper and onions with the ground beef.Mrs. Adams: Yes, and divide the mixture into balls. Then make the balls into patties.Mrs. Wong: What is a patty?Mrs. Adams: You just press down on a ball and make it flat. Patties are flattened balls. If you wantto get more than four patties out of a pound of meat, just make the patties thinner.But don’t handle the meat too much.Mrs. Wong: Why not?Mrs. Adams: Because it will make the hamburgers tough. They’ll be hard and tough.Mrs. Wong: Then I suppose you cook them on top of the stove.Mrs. Adams: Yes, in a hot frying pan. Put some butter in the pan and let it melt. Then put the hamburger patties in.Mrs. Wong: How long do you cook them?Mrs. Adams: That depends on how you like them. Some people like them rare— red inside. Mrs. Wong: I don’t like them rare!Mrs. Adams: If you like them medium or well-done, cook them longer.Mrs. Wong: Then you put them between pieces of bread.Mrs. Adams: Most people use special rolls. You put the hamburger inside the big roll, and serve it with ketchup and pickles. I let my family spread ketchup on their own hamburgers,if they want it.Mrs. Wong: Is that all you need to do?Mrs. Adams: That’s all.Task 5【答案】A.1) 4,700, ten, eleven2) London, Paris, same, apple pies, coffee, Cola, orange drink, thick milk3) white, cream, yellow, green4) paper bags, thick paper cupsB.1) F, 2) F, 3) T, 4) TC.1) In an ordinary restaurant you go to a table and sit down. A waiter or waitress brings you a menu and you choose your meal. Then you wait for the food. The waiter brings the food to your table, and at the end of the meal he brings you the bill. Then you pay for the meal and go home.In a fast food restaurant you look at the price list in the widow or on the wall rather than a menu. Then you go to the counter and give your order. You don’t wait for your food. The staff behind the counter have special machines and special routines. They prepare the food very quickly and put it in boxes, cups or bags.2) Because you eat it from the bag or box with your fingers.【原文】Do you want a good meal? Do you want a quick meal’? Then go to a fast food restaurant. There are now thousands of fast food restaurants in the cities of the world. One famous name is Harry’s Hamburgers. Harry’s Hamburgers come from America and they are 22 years old. There are 4,700 Harry’s Hamburgers in 25 different countries. In England the restaurants open at ten o’clock in the morning and close at eleven o’clock at night. They are open every day of the week and every week of the year. But they close on 25th December, Christmas Day. All the restaurants serve the same food. In London or New York, Paris or Madrid, people eat the same hamburgers, French fries and apple pie. And they drink the same drinks: coffee, Cola, orange drink or thickmilk shake.In an ordinary cafe or restaurant you go to a table and sit down. A waiter or waitress brings you a menu and you choose your meal. Then you wait for the food. Sometimes you wait for half an hour. That’s a long time. The waiter brings the food to your table, and at the end of the meal he brings you the bill. Then you pay for the meal and go home.In a fast-food restaurant you don’t sit at a table and look at a menu. You look at the price-list in the window or on the wall, and choose your meal. Then you go to the counter and give your order. You don’t wait for your food. The staff behind the counter have special machines and special routines. They prepare the food very quickly, and put it in boxes, cups or bags.Quarterpounder hamburgers come in white boxes, cheeseburgers in cream boxes, half-pounders in a yellow box and fishburgers in green boxes. They put French fries and apple pies in paper bags and serve all the drinks in thick paper cups. At Harry’s Hamburgers you pay for your meal before you eat it. The person at the counter takes your money and gives you your order. People often eat in the restaurants. They get their food on a tray and take it to a table. Fast food is finger food— you eat it from the bag or box with you fingers. After the meal you put your bags, paper cups and boxes in a big litter bin.Many people don’t eat in the restaurants but take their meal away. They get their order in a strong paper bag and take it to their office, to a park or to their homes. But the food always tastes the same. Millions of people in the world eat it — and like i t. Harry’s Hamburgers sell mi llions of hamburgers in a year.Task 6【答案】1) Two hamburgers, a cheeseburger, two small French-fries, a coffee, a cola and a chocolate milk shake. And it’s take-away.2) Three pounds twenty-one pence.3) They can find little packets of milk and sugar in the bag.【原文】Customer staff: Good morning. What is your order please?Customer: Two hamburgers, a cheeseburger and two small French-fries, please.Customer staff: Do you want drinks?Customer: Yes, please. A coffee, a Cola and a chocolate milk shake.Customer staff: Right. Do you want to eat here or take away?Customer: Take-away please.Customer staff: Two hamburgers, a cheeseburger, two small French-fries, a coffee, a cola and a chocolate milk shake. And it’s take-away. That’s three pounds twenty-one penceplease.Customer: Here you are.Customer staff: Thank you. Here’s one pound seventy-nine pence change. And here’s your order.Customer: Thanks. Is there milk and sugar for the coffee?Customer staff: Yes, there is. We put little packets of milk and sugar in the bag.Customer: I see. Thank you.Customer staff: Thank you. Enjoy your meal.Task 7【答案】1) Tomato soup for Sally and mushroom soup for Peter.2) Sally orders roast mutton with mint, boiled potatoes and some Brussels sprouts. Peter orders roast beef and Yorkshire pudding with gravy, and some boiled cabbage.3) They both have some apple tart and vanilla ice-cream.4) Because both the food and the service there are excellent.【原文】Peter and Sally are having Sunday dinner together at a well-known restaurant in Bayswater. Waiter: Good evening, sir; good evening, madam. There’s a table for two over by the window.This way, please.Peter: Thank you. Could we see the menu, please?Waiter: Certainly. Here you are, sir.Peter: Thank you. Well, now, Sally, what do you fancy?Sally: I think I’ll have some tomato soup first.Peter: And I’ll have mushroom soup. Bring us some rolls and butter with the soup, please. Waiter: Yes, sir.Peter: What kind of meat do you prefer, Sally? I see they have roast beef, pork chops, mutton and steak.Sa lly: I’d like roast mutton with mint, please, and boiled potatoes. Some Brussels sprouts, too, please.Peter: I’ll have roast beef and Yorkshire pudding with gravy, please, and some boiled cabbage. Sally: Afterwards, I’d like some apple tart and vanilla ic e-cream.Peter: The same for me, please. (to Sally) What shall we have to drink, Sally? Some red wine? Sally: French burgundy is my favourite, you know.Peter: All right. (to the Waiter)A bottle of French burgundy, please.Waiter: Straight away, sir.Sally: It’s nice to have a meal out for a change, isn’t it?Peter: Yes, and this is one of my favourite places. Both the food and the service are excellent here.Task 8【答案】A.1) Cosmopolitan means “consisting of people from many different parts of the world”.2) He means that all those kinds of food have already become a normal part of a Londoner’s diet today.3) The Indian and Pakistani restaurants are the cheapest ones.4) No. Almost all the restaurants there serve Cantonese dishes, but there’s one that specializes in Peking cuisine.5) They are going to have a look in the Guanghua Bookshop.B.1) sprung, mushrooms, immensely, with2) under the sun, represented, somewhere or another3) come onto the scene4) all the more5) colorful, atmosphere, overhead6) soup, boiled, As for, sweet, sour, fried chicken, green【原文】Nick and David are walking through Oxford Street looking for a place to eat.Nick: You Londoners certainly have a very cosmopolitan taste these days! It seems almost impossible to find an English restaurant here anywhere. Nearly every restaurant I see seems to be Italian, Greek, Chinese or Indian!David: You’re right. These foreign restaurants have sprung up like mushrooms all over London and have become immensely popular with everyone. There can be no doubt that our eating habits have changed greatly in the past eight or ten years. Italian spaghetti, Greek kebabs and salads, Chinese chicken chow mien and Indian curries are all a normal part of a Londoner’s diet nowadays. In fact, we hardly ever think of such things as being foreign anymore.Nick: This is true in the North of England and the Midlands, as well, at any rate in the larger towns and cities. But here in London, every nationality under the sun seems to be represented in a restaurant somewhere or another.David: Yes. The big American hamburger and steak houses are very popular nowadays. Several Japanese and some Korean and Indonesian restaurants have come onto the scene recently, too.Nick: That makes London all the more fascinating, doesn’t it?David: That’s right. But most of these restaurants are rather expensive.Nick: I hear that the Indian and Pakistani restaurants are the cheapest ones.David: Yes, and the food is usually excellent. But there are plenty of good Chinese restaurants, too, where the prices are very moderate and the meals superb. The best ones are down in Gerrard Street, behind Piccadilly Circus in what we call “Chinatown”.Nick: Why don’t we go to one of them now? Is Gerrard Street far from here?David: No. We’ll just turn right here and go down Wardour Street through Soho. It’ll only take us about ten minutes to get to Gerrard Street.Nick: Wonderful! I’m dead keen on Chinese food, you know.David: Almost all the restaurants there serve Cantonese dishes, but there’s one that specializes in Peking cuisine.Nick: Oh, here we are; I can tell by all those signs in Chinese that this is the street we’re looking for.David: Yes. There are about twelve very good Chinese restaurants here. We’ll have a look at both sides of the street first and then decide on one.Nick: I see that there are some Chinese supermarkets here, too.David: Oh, yes. And there on the right is the Hong Kong Cultural Centre and just beside it, a Chinese cinema. Just around the corner here, in Newport Place, there’s the Guanghua Bookshop, where all sorts of newspapers, books, magazines, records and art from the People’s Republic of China are sold. I know the manager there well. We can go in a nd have a look after we’ve had lunch.Nick: Good. Which restaurant do you recommend?David: “The Far East” is my favourite. They serve both Cantonese and Pekinese dishes. Let’s go in.Nick: What a colourful Chinese atmosphere here with all those red lanterns overhead and thosebeautiful pictures on the wall!Waiter: Good afternoon, gentlemen.Nick: This is fabulous, David; there a re more than 100 Chinese dishes listed here! You’d better do the choosing. I’m not acquainted with very many of them.David: All right. (to the waiter) Two bowls of shark’s fin soup, two large bowls of boiled rice and two spring rolls. As for the mixed dis hes, we’ll have sweet and sour pork with pineapple, fried chicken with garlic sauce and peanuts and a bowl of sliced beef with green peppers. Waiter: What kind of tea would you like, gentlemen, English or Chinese?David: Chinese jasmine tea, please. (to Nick) Can you eat with chopsticks, Nick?Nick: Yes, but not very well.David: Never mind, I’ll teach you how to use them properly. It’s as easy as ABC.Task 9【答案】A.1) Harvest Festival takes place in the autumn.2) Because it started Christianity.3) In the old days farmers kept some of the last corn and decorated it with flowers. They also made little dolls out of corn, which are called corn dollies.B.1) F, 2) T【原文】Harvest Festival takes place in the autumn. It is a very ancient festival which started before Christianity. At the end of the summer people always thanked their gods for the harvest. A good harvest gave everyone food for the winter. A bad harvest brought disaster. In the modern world rich countries can buy food from abroad, so there is always food in the shops. People do not worry about the harvest, but they still celebrate Harvest Festival. They decorate the churches with flowers, fruit and vegetables and have a special service. Many schools celebrate Harvest Festival too. Teachers and students bring food and flowers to decorate the school hall. After the Harvest Festival they take their harvest gifts to Old People’s Homes or to hospitals.In the old days farmers kept some of the last corn and decorated it with flowers. They also made little dolls out of corn, called corn dollies. Each farm kept a corn dolly until the next year, to bring them a good harvest. Today people copy these ancient ideas for their Harvest Festival decorations. Past and present come together in this favorite festival.Task 10【答案】A.1) 18th century, hand, 1742, 18142) height, 1.5, 2, 2,000B.1) Mustard has strong yellow colour and hot taste. We can see it with salt and pepper on every good dinner table.2) There are two main kinds of mustard, one with brown seeds and the other with white. They both produce a rich yellow “flour” and contain mustard oil. The oil form the brown seeds has a strong taste, and the oil from the white seeds is hot, like pepper. Good modern mustard is madefrom both kinds of seed.3) One ton per acre in a good year.【原文】Everyone knows mustard, with its strong yellow colour and hot taste. You see it with salt and pepper on every good dinner table. But where does it come from? How does it get onto our tables?The Romans probably brought mustard to Britain, and farmers in eastern England have grown it ever since. Until the 18th century, people ground the seed by hand, but there have been special mustard mills since 1742. The largest firm in Britain started in 1814 and now exports mustard all over the world.There are two main kinds of mustard, one with brown seeds and the other with white. They both produce a rich yellow “flour” and contain mustard oil. The oil from the brown seeds has a strong taste, and the oil from the white seeds is hot, like pepper. Good modern mustard is made from both kinds of seed. The mustard plant grows to a height of about 1.5 to 2 metres, and each seed can multiply itself 2,000 times in one season.Jimmy Hazel has a 400-acre farm eight kilometres south of Norwich. He does not keep any animals, but grows several different crops: wheat, sugar beet, barley and mustard. He uses 10 percent of his land for mustard.“The mustard seed arrives from the factory at the end of winter— one kilogram for each acre of land. I plant it in March and it usually flowers in June. The mustard fields always look very pretty, but I have to watch out for weeds and insects. When the plants begin to die, I check the seeds. They’re ready when you can shake them in the pod. In August or September we harvest our crop. With a combine harvester it takes about a day to cover the mustard fields. Then I send the seed to the mill, where they check it. If there are any weeds or wheat in the crop, they won’t take it. And I don’t get any money for it! In a good year I produce about 40 tons of mustard seed.”Task 11【答案】A.1) animalsa) pork, beef, mutton, butter, cheeseb) Lambd) chicken, duck, turkey2)a) apples, oranges, bananas, tomatoesb) tea, potatoesc) rice, wheatdifferent plants and animals need different climates1) cool, Scotland, New Zealand2) any part of the world, more milk3) cool4) warm, dry, the Mediterranean5) sun, rain, tropical, Africa, South AmericaB.Bakers, butcher, grocer’s, shops, street market, supermarket, healthy【原文】We all need food. We cannot live without it. What kinds of food do we need? Where does our food come from?There are two basic kinds of food. One comes from animals and the other from plants. Meat comes from animals: we get pork from pigs, beef from cows and mutton from sheep. Lamb is the name for the meat from young sheep, or lambs. Fish from the sea is meat too, and we also eat birds like chicken, duck and turkey. We get other products from birds and animals too. Eggs come from chickens and ducks, and from cows’ milk people make but ter and cheese.From plants we get fruit, vegetables and cereals. A lot of our fruit grows on trees: apples, oranges and bananas. Many small plants have fruit too, like the coffee plant. So coffee is really a fruit drink! What about tea? Tea comes from a plant, but it is not a fruit. We make tea from the leaves of a small plant, so tea is a vegetable. And what about tomatoes? “Tomatoes are vegetables,” people say. “No,they’re not,” say the scientists. “Tomatoes are really fruit.” Some kinds of vegetables grow under the ground. The potato is one example. Different kinds of grass also give us food, called cereals. Rice and wheat are important cereals. Millions of people in the world eat rice or make bread from wheat.Where does our daily food come from? Some people grow their own food, but usually farmers produce our food for us. Different kinds of food come from different countries. Why? Because different plants and animals need different climates. Sheep, for example, have thick woolly coats, so they can live in a cool climate. You find sheep in countries like Scotland and New Zealand. Cows can live in any part of the world, but they produce more milk in cool climates.Apples like a cool climate. They are the number one British fruit. But oranges need a warm, dry climate. So oranges grow well in the countries round the Mediterranean. Bananas like a lot of sun and rain, so they only grow well in the tropical climates of countries in Africa and South America.Many different shops sell food. Bakers sell bread and butchers sell meat. You find eggs, milk, butter and cheese, rice, coffee and tea in a grocer’s shop. You can buy fish, fruit and vegetables from shops or in a street market. And, of course, there is one shop for everything— a supermarket. Remember, you must buy good food for a healthy life. Do you eat the right food?Task 12【答案】1) He wanted to investigate the mysteries of the sausage.2) Because everyone in a food factory has to keep clean and tidy and cover all the hair of the head. 【原文】Announcer: We sent Tom Brown on a special mission. His destination—a town somewhere in Wiltshire and his task — to investigate the mysteries of the sausage.Tom Brown: New York has the Empire State Building; Rome has the Colosseum; Paris has the Eiffel Tower and the Pompidou Centre. But Trowbridge, Trowbridge has Bowyers.Yes I’ve come here to Trowbridge early on a gray January morning, to investigate atopic close to my heart — or rather close to my stomach — something I can reallyget my teeth into. Behind me is the Bowyers factory. I’m about to go through thisgateway of gastrono mic delights, to visit this Mecca of the meat pie. What’s goingon inside, I wonder? Are innocent sausages being frightened out of their skins? Aremeat pies doing their crusts? I’m going in to talk to Mr. Cook, the site manager, toask some important, probing questions. Why are sausages called bangers, forinstance?Mr. Cook: No, I’m sorry, I don’t know. No, I don’t know, no.Tom Brown: I’ve noticed that everyone in the factory seems to be wearing a different kind of white hat.Mr. Cook: Well, everyone in a food factory has to keep clean and tidy and cover all the hair of the head. You will be putting on a hat such as the operators on the shop floor wearwhich is a white peaked hat with a snood down the back to cover all the hair on yourhead.Tom Brown: Yes, I see it’s got a rather fetching hairnet at the back...Task 13【答案】Judy thought that she would enjoy her first day on the job, but everything went wrong. First she overslept. She was so upset about that that she caught the wrong bus. She got to the soft drink factory at nine instead of eight thirty. Her new boss, who was a tall fat man, was very angry. He taught her what to do in a rush. All she had to do was watch a machine fill bottles with Cola. Then she pushed a button and sent the bottles to be capped.At lunch, her boss sent her out to buy him a sandwich. She bought herself some fruit, but dropped it and stepped on it. By the end of the afternoon she felt hungry, bored and tired. And she never wanted to see another bottle of Cola in her life. The next morning she got to work on time and quit!。

《现代大学英语听力》听力原文及答案Unit

《现代大学英语听力》听力原文及答案Unit

《现代大学英语听力2》听力原文及答案U n i t1U n i t 1Task 1【答案】A.1) She wanted to see St. Paul’s Cathedral.2) She was so surprised because she saw so many Englishmen who looked alike.3) They were all wearing dark suits and bowler hats, carrying umbrellas and newspapers.4) Because she had often read about them and seen photographs of them, who all looked as if they were wearing a uniform.5) No, he didn’t.6) He used the English saying “It takes all kinds to make a world” to prove his opinion.B.If all the seas were one sea, what a great sea it would be! And if all the trees were one tree, what a great tree it would be! And if this tree were to fall in the sea, what a great splash there would be!【原文】Yesterday morning Gretel went to the City of London. She wanted to see St. Paul's Cathedral. She was surprised to see so many Englishmen who looked alike. They were all wearing dark suits and bowler hats. They were all carrying umbrellas and newspapers. When she returned home she asked Mr clark about these strange creatures. "They must be typical English gentlemen," she said." I have often read about them and seen photographs of them. They all look as if they are wearing a uniform. Does the typical English gentleman still exist?"Mr. Clark laughed. "I've never thought about it," he answered." It's true that many of the men who work in the City of London still wear bowler hate and I suppose they are typical Englishmen. But look at this." Mr. Clark picked up a magazine and pointed at a photo of a young man. "He's just as typical, perhaps. It seems as if there is no such thing as a 'typical' Englishman. Do you know the English saying 'It takes all kinds to make a world'? That's true of all countries-including England."“Oh, just like the poem ‘If All the Seas Were One Sea’,” Gretel began to hum happily. If all the seas were one sea, what a great sea that would be! If all the trees were one tree, what a great tree that would be! And if this tree were to fall in the sea, w hat a great splash that would be!”Task 2【答案】A.1) people were much busier2) colder than England; minus thirty degrees; last longer3) much more mountainous; much higher and much more rocky; more beautiful4) tend to be more crowded5) the houses; smallerB.1) T 2) T 3) F 4) F 5) F【原文】John is British but has worked in Japan. Etsuko is Japanese from Osaka, but she is studying in Britain. In the following passage you are going to hear, they are comparing life as they see it in the two countries. But before listening to it, think of the two countries and try to answer the following pre-listening questions.John: I found that living in Japan, people were busier. They seem to work the whole day.Etsuko: Yes, that’s right. We work from Monday through Saturday, even in summer. You know, summer in Japan is just horrible. It’s very, very humid and hot, and you need to shower three times a day.John: So you find it cooler in England?Etsuko: Yes, that’s right.John: Where I was living in Japan, in the North, it was much colder than England, especially in winter, minus thirty degrees centigrade. Does the winter in Osaka last longer than the winter in England?Etsuko: No, I don’t think so. December, January, February, March.John: Yes. It’s a little bit shorter if anything.Etsuko: Ever since I came here, I noticed that the countryside here in England is very beautiful.John: It’s much flatter than in Japan.Etsuko: Yes. Japan is a mountainous country and our cities are full of people. There are lots of people in a limited flat area.John: Yes, I found Japan much more mountainous than Britain, especially in the north. The mountains are much higher and much more rocky. I found it more beautiful than Britain, I think.Etsuko: Yes, if you like mountains.John: And therefore the towns and villages tend to be more crowded.Etsuko: Yes, that’s right.John: Yes. So because the cities are more crowded, the houses tend to be smaller, don’t they?Etsuko: Yes, they are very compact, and we don’t hav e a lot of space. In big cities we have a lot of taller buildings now.John: Is this a problem because there are more earthquakes in Japan?Etsuko: Yes, that’s right and…Task 3【答案】A.1) In the US, people usually dance just to enjoy themselves; they don’t invite other people to watch them.2)Usually eight people dance together.3)Because people form a square in dancing with a man and a woman on each side ofthe square.4) He usually makes it into a song.5) They wear old-fashioned clothes.B.1) F 2) T 3) F 4) F 5) TC.1) eight people form a square; on each side of the square2) what they should do; makes it into a song; sings it3) don’t have much time to think4) old-fashioned clothes【原文】Rosa: Why don’t you have folk dances in the United States? Most countries have special dances that the people have done for many years. The dancers wear clothes from the old days. Everyone likes to watch them dance.Steve: We have folk dances, too. A lot of people belong to folk dancing groups. But when they dance, they usually do it just to enjoy themselves. They don’t invite other people to watch them.Rosa: Is there a folk dancing group here?Steve: I think so. There must be. There’s one in almost every city, and some big cities have several.Rosa: What are the dances like?Steve: Usually eight people dance together, four men and four women. When they start, they form a square, with a man and a woman on each side of the square. That’s why it’s called square dancing.Then there’s a man who tells the dancers what they should do. He usually makes it into a song. He sings it while they dance.Rosa: Oh, that should make the dances easy!Steve: Yes, but they are very fast. They don’t have much time to think. I like to watch them, though. The dancers wear old-fashioned clothes. That makes the dances pretty to watch.Rosa: I’d like to watch a group dance.Steve: I’ll take you sometime.Task 4【答案】1) It was a time to celebrate the end of winter and the beginning of spring.2) They burned the picture of their kitchen god to bring good luck.3) The custom said the brides must wear “something old, something new, somethingborrowed, and something blue” to bring good luck.4)Because they could not eat meat, eggs or dairy products during Lent, so theytried to use up these things before Lent began.5)It was a straw man made by children in Czech; it was a figure of death.6)People brought their animals to church. And before the animals went into thechurch people dressed them up in flowers and ribbons.【原文】1) On the evening of February 3rd, people in Japanese families took one dried bean for each year of their age and threw the beans on the floor, shouting "Good luck in! Evil spirits out!" This was known as "Setsubun", a time to celebrate the end of winter and the beginning of spring.2) Before the Chinese Lunar New Year in the old days, many Chinese families burned the picture of their kitchen god to bring good luck. When Lunar New Year's Day came, they put ancw picture of the kitchen god on the wall.3) When American women got married, they sometimes followed an old custom in choosing what to wear on their wedding day. The custom said the bride must wear "something old, something new, something borrowed, and something blue". This was to bring good luck.4) Before Lent (a time on the Christian calendar), the people of Ponti, Italy ate an omelet made with 1,000 eggs. People could not eat meat, eggs or dairy products during Lent, so they tried to use up these things before Lent began.5) When winter ended in Czech, the children made a straw man called "Smrt", which was a figure of death. They burned it or threw it in the river. After they destroyed it, they carried flowers home to show the arrival of spring.6) January 17th was St. Anthony's Day in Mexico. It was a day when people brought their animals to church. But before the animals went into the church, the people dressed them up in flowers and ribbons. This ceremony was to protect people's animals.Task 5【答案】A.1) F 2) T 3) F 4) T 5) F 6) T 7) TB.Man: Well, I think life used to be much more fun than it is now. I mean, look at the Victorians. They had lots of servants to do all the work; they never had to do any cooking or cleaning; they just wore those beautiful dresses and went to tea parties.Woman: You must be joking! Their clothes were terribly uncomfortable and their teaparties were very formal and boring. They used to wear their hats and long gloves even when they were eating cakes and biscuits. And men were not usually invited.Man: Really? Weren't they?Woman: And think of the poor servants. What a terrible life — just cleaning and cooking for other people all the time!Man: But you hate housework!Woman: Yes, I know, but there are lots of machines now to help you with the housework.People don't need servants.Man: Maybe they don't, but life then was much slower than it is now-people nowadays are always rushing, and they never have time to stop and enjoy themselves. Woman: Life then was fine for the rich, but it was dreadful for the poor. There was much more illness. They didn't have the money to pay doctors, and they often used to die of illnesses that don't exist in England now.Man: Maybe. But people used to talk to each other, play the piano or play cards together. Nowadays people just sit in front of the television for hours and never talk to each other.Woman: I agree with you about television; but what about their children? They left their Children with the servants all day. Children hardly ever saw their parents! And the clothes they had to wear! Horrible, tight, uncomfortable, grown-up clothes. Children have a much better life now than they used to, and schools and education are much better too.Man: I hate school.Woman: And look at opportunities for women. In those days, women used to stay at home, play the piano, change their clothes several times a day and have tea parties. What a life! They didn't have any freedom at all. I'm very happy living now. I can work, have a career, do what I want to.Man: You mean you can work hard all your life like a Victorian servant. Woman: Life isn't all tea parties, you know.Task 6【答案】A.1) b 2) a 3) c 4) aB.1) family unit; process; change; used to be; the extended; the nuclear2) job patterns; progressed; agricultural; industrial; forced; job opportunities; split up3) traditional; family; expanded; other living arrangementsC.1) mother, father, children, and some other relatives, such as grandparents, living in the same house or nearby2)only the parents and the children3)previously married men and women marry again and combine the children from formermarriages into a new family【原文】The American family unit is in the process of change. There used to be mainly two types offamilies: the extended and the nuclear. The extended family most often included mother, father, children, and some other relatives, such as grandparents, living in the same house or nearby. Then as job patterns changed and the economy progressed from agricultural to industrial, people were forced to move to different parts of the country for job opportunities. These moves split up the extended family. The nuclear family became more prevalent; this consisted of only the parents and the children. Now besides these two types of traditional groupings, the word "family" is being expanded to include a variety of other living arrangements.Today's family can be made up of diverse combinations. With the divorce rate nearly one in two, there is an increase in single parent homes: a father or mother living with one or more children. "Blended families" occur when previously married men and women marry again and combine the children from former marriages into a new family. On the other hand, some couples are deciding not to have any children at all, so there is an increase in childless families. There are also more people who live alone: single, widowed, divorced. Now one in five Americans lives alone.Task 7【答案】A.B.1) c 2) c 3) a 4) b 5) c 6) c 7) c【原文】In Japan both men and women go to university and both men and women study the arts such as history or English. But very few women study science, medicine or engineering. In engineering classes of thirty or forty students, there may be only one or two women. Men and women both go to university in order to get good jobs: men want to work for a big company, be successful, earn a lot of money and support a family; women, on the other hand, want to work for a big company because they have a better chance of meeting a successful man and getting married. This is changing, however, as Japanese women begin to think about their own careers. They have began to take jobs which they like rather than jobs in order to find a husband.Men work for their whole lives and usually stay with the same company. A woman may work up to ten years, but after that she usually gets married. Most women are married by the age of twenty seven, then they stay at home and look after the children.A man does not cook or look after the children. When he comes home, his meal must be ready. The woman may go out in the afternoon, shopping with her friends or having a chat, but she must go back home by four o'clock to prepare the meal. Then she may have to wait a long time for her husband to come home. Often he has to go out for a drink after work: if he doesn't he may not rise very high in the company. After her children grow up, a woman can go back to work, but it is not easy. If her former company takes older women back, she might be lucky. But most women find it difficult to find a job when they are older.Task 8【答案】A.1) a 2) c 3) b 4) c 5) c 6) b 7) c 8) bB.1) T 2) T 3) F 4) F 5) T 6) F 7) F 8) F 9) T 10) F【原文】Matthew: Geth, how do people set about getting married in England?Geth: I suppose the most common way is still for people to go home. For example, people who live in London now will go back to their homes in the provinces where they'll meet all their relatives and their parents, and they'll get married in a church, with the bride wearing white, the traditional white.Then they'll go off and have a booze-up with their relatives and friends and a jolly good time will be had by all. Otherwise you can get married ina registry office, which means you turn up with your bride-to-be orbridegroom-to-be with two witnesses only. The ceremony takes about five minutes, I suppose. You sign the form and that's it.Matthew: There are many today who say that marriage is a complete waste of time.What's your view of marriage in the twentieth century?Goth: Well, I live in London as you know. I think in London, the tendency is to...for a... boy and girl, man or woman to live together before marriage and often to live together without any prospect of marriage at all. I think this probably is... is true of London and the other big cities than elsewhere,because after all people in London are living in a big place where home ties are obviously less restrictive. They can do more or less as they please andI think this is the pattern.Matthew: But do you think it helps for people to live together before taking their vows?Geth: I think in a sense the habit of living together before marriage may, ina strange sort of way, make marriage stronger, because after all the peoplewill know each other better when they do get married and it might be suggested that divorce would be less likely between such a couple.Matthew: Sue, you've been married for two or three years now. How's it working out? Sue: I think it's a successful marriage. It's... I mean, it's difficult to say why, because we basically suit each other very much. We have a goodfriendship, apart from anything else, and, you know, we just go together very well because we respect each other's freedom and individuality, but on the other hand we really need each other, you know, it's... Matthew: What about.., have you thought of having children?Sue: Well, obviously, like most young couples, we have thought about it, but, you know, we both feel rather, sort of, loath to lose our freedom just yet.I think we'll probably wait another few years.Matthew: Is it easy in England today to people to get divorced, or is that quite difficult?Chris: I think technically it's probably fairly easy, I think, because I'm not English but, I think technically it's fairly easy to be... to get divorced.But it's not just the technicality of it which is the problem. Divorce is...is a social stigma which people can probably Cope with to varying degrees, but it's also a lot easier for the man because the woman, after she is divorced is, in fact, frowned upon by... by a lot of people in society. She is... is...at a... a much more difficult social position in terms of... of meeting other men, or whatever, simply because she is a divorcee.Task 9【原文】Social customs and ways of behaving change. But they do not necessarily always change for the better. Things which were considered impolite many years ago are now acceptable. Just a few years ago, it was considered impolite behaviour for a man to smoke on the street. No man who thought of himself as being a gentleman would make a fool of himself by smoking when a lady was in the room.The important thing to remember about social customs is not to do anything that might make other people feel uncomfortable — especially if they are your guests. There is a story about a rich nobleman who had a very formal dinner party. When the food was served, one of the guests started to eat his peas with a knife. Other guests were amused or shocked, but the nobleman calmly picked up his knife and began eating in the same way. It would have been bad manners to make his guest feel foolish oruncomfortable.。

现代大学英语听力2听力原文及题目答案Unit

现代大学英语听力2听力原文及题目答案Unit

《现代大学英语听力2》听力原文及题目答案Unit 2Unit 2Task 1【答案】1) b 2) a 3) d【原文】Texas was the biggest state before Alaska became the forty-ninth state in 1959. One good way to understand the size of Texas is to learn about its weather. Different parts of the state have very different kinds of weather.Laredo is one of the hottest cities in the United States in summer. The best time to visit Laredo is in winter, when it is pleasantly warm.Amarillo gets very cold in winter. Sometimes there is more snow in Amarillo than in New York, which is a northern city. Summers are better, but sometimes it gets quite hot. The best time to visit Amarillo is in the autumn when it is cool.If anyone asks you about the weather in Texas, ask him, “What part of Texas do you mean?”Task 2【答案】A.1)T 2) F 3) FB.1) d 2) c 3) cC.climate, reputation, extraordinary, unreliable, dry, wet, clear, dull, hot, cold, bad, mild【原文】Our friend, Nick, whose English gets better and better, declared solemnly the other day that he thought that the British climate was wonderful, but the British weather was terrible. He went on to explain by pointing out that the British climate was a temperate one. This meant, he said, "that you could always be certain that the weather would never be extreme —at any rate not for any length of time —never very hot and never very cold." He quite rightly pointed out that the rainfall in Britain, according to the statistics, was not very heavy. "Why then," he asked, "has the British climate such a bad reputation?" He answered by saying it was because of the extraordinary, unreliable weather. There was no part of the year at which you could be certain that the weather would be dry or wet, clear or dull, hot or cold. A bad day in July could be as cold as a mild day in January. Indeed you could feel cold at almost any time of the year. Nick blamed drafty British houses for this, but agreed you could also blame the small amount of sunshine and a great amount of dampness. He advised every student coming to Britain to bring an umbrella and to understand the meaning of that splendid word "drizzle".Task 3【答案】I.the country; Trees, grass, lakes and steamsII.A.1. concrete, iron, steel2. take in the heat during the day and throw off heat into the air at nightB. Warmer winters, car engines; electrical applianceⅢ.A. air pollution may stop sunlight from reaching the earthB.1. Ice near the North and South poles to melt2. to be slowly flooded and people living in these cities to move to higher land 【原文】Cities change the climate around you. In the country, there are trees, grass, lakes, and streams. In hot weather, the trees and grass cool the area around them. Lakes and rivers also cool the area around them.But cities are not cooled in these natural ways. Cities are built of asphalt, concrete, iron, andsteel. There are few trees and usually not much grass. Rain falls onto the streets and into the sewers.When the summer sun shines, streets and buildings take in the heat; after the sun sets, the streets and buildings throw off heat into the street. Once the sun sets, the countryside cools off, but a city may stay hot all night.Cities are hotter than the countryside in winter, too. Standing near a car with its motor running, winter or summer, you will feel the heat thrown off by the engine. The heat comes from the gasoline burned by the engine. This heat warms the air and the ground around the car. Thousands of running cars are almost like thousands of small fires burning.Carefully put your hand near a light bulb or television set. As you can see, electricity creates a lot of heat. This heat from electricity warms the house and the outside air.The heat given off by cities can affect the climate. Some experts even believe that cities can change the climate of the whole world. They think that air pollution may stop sunlight from reaching the earth. If less sunshine reaches the earth, the earth may become cooler.Still other experts think the world will get warmer. If the world did get warmer, great changes would occur. Ice near the North and South poles would melt. This would make the oceans rise. Cities near oceans — like Los Angeles, Boston, and Miami —would slowly be flooded. People living in these cities would have to move to higher land.Task 4【答案】A.1) b 2) cB. night, delight; morning, warning; gray, way, red, headC.1) F 2) T 3) F【原文】A red sky at either dusk or dawn is one of the spectacular and beautiful weather predictors we have in nature. By closely observing this phenomenon, you can achieve short-range accuracy of the weather as good as, or better than your local weatherman. In the Bible, Jesus in Matthew 16, 2-3 is quoted as saying, “When it is evening, it will be fair weather: for the sky is red. And in the morning it will be foul weather today: for the sky is red” when speaking to the Pharisees. An old English weather proverb based on this passage is:Red sky at night, sailors delight.Red sky at morning, sailors take warning.OrEvening red and morning gray,Sends the traveler on his way.Evening gray, morning red,Brings the rain down on his head.At dusk, a red sky indicates that dry weather is on the way. This is due to the sun shining through dust particles being pushed ahead of a high pressure system bringing in dry air. A red sky in the morning is due to the sun again shining through dust. In this case however, the dust is being pushed on by an approaching low reassure system bringing in moisture. Don't confuse a red sky in the morning with a red sun in the morning. If the sun itself is red and the sky is a normal color, the day will be fair.Task 5【答案】1) c 2) b 3) d 4) c 5) c【原文】Mark: I am an avid fly fisherman and frequently find myself on the river in a raft during lightning storms. We always have a debate at thesetimes on where we are safest —pulling into shore or staying on thewater. Since I have heard one is safe in a car when lightning strikesI wonder if the raft floating on the water is insulated, and thereforethe safest place to be.Meteorologist A: We spoke with some scientists about your question, and they all agreed that under no circumstances should you remain on the waterduring a lightning storm. If your raft is made of rubber, you mightfeel that you're .well insulated, but don't kid yourself. Typicallightning flashes travel 10 to 15 kilometers and can deliver as muchas 100,000 amps of current. In comparison, a toaster uses about 10amps of current. If lightning strikes the water near you, it willhave no trouble traveling through a few extra centimeters of rubber. Meteorologist B: So, if you're on the water and a thunderstorm approaches, get to the shore and seek shelter on land. Try a building or car. If neitheris available, look for a cave, cliff, wall, or a group of trees. Nevertake shelter under an isolated tree-it's also a good target forlightning.Task 6【答案】A.1) F 2) T 3) F 4) T 5) F 6) TB.Incredible, one minute, one kilometer, destroyed, lifted up, carried away, killed, injured【原文】Every spring and summer many inland areas are hit by tornados. A tornado is a kind of storm. It's a revolving, funnel-shaped column of air that moves through the sky at very high speeds. A tornado looks like a huge, black ice cream cone whirling through the sky. The speed of a tornado is very fast-it is believed to be between 200 and 700 kilometers per hour.Tornados form under very special weather conditions, and these special weather conditions occur most often in inland areas, such as the central United States. A tornado forms when a layer of warm, dry air is on top of a layer of cooler, moist air. This combination of dry, warm air above wet, cool air creates a condition that causes the lower layer of air to lift up. As the lower air rises, both layers of air begin to rotate, to turn around and around. The air begins to rotate faster and faster because of centrifugal force. The tornado has a center called an “eye” and the air rotates quickly around this eye.As the air begins to rotate faster and faster, the tornado cloud begins to grow downward; that is, it begins to form a funnel or cone, and this cone goes down toward the ground.The cone of air is dark because it develops from a dark rain cloud. As the cloud gets longer, as the cloud gets closer to the ground, it begins to pull up dirt from the ground. Then the funnel ofrotating air becomes very dark because of the dirt in it. As the tornado funnel gets longer, it begins to drag along the ground.When the tornado touches the ground, it does incredible damage. It usually touches the ground for only about one minute, and it usually travels along the ground for only about one kilometer, but during that one minute, buildings are destroyed, trees are lifted up out of the ground, small objects are carried away, and sometimes people are injured or killed.Task 7【答案】A.1) b 2) a 3) bB.1) It has been nice weather during the day, but it is going to change at night.2) Fine weather in southern Europe and not so nice in northern EuropeFor todaySoutheast England---26 degrees Celsius by mid-afternoonSouthern Scotland---Maximum temperatures of around 21 degreesBrighton---15 hours of lovely sunshineMidlands---23 degrees Celsius by early afternoonNorthwest of Scotland---Light showers around middayFor the weekendSpain---34 degrees CelsiusGreece---32 degrees CelsiusFrance---Cloudy with rain, maximum temperatures of 22 degreesNorthern Ireland---Heavy rain, 17 degrees CelsiusMost of England---Cloudy but mainly dry with sunny periods, 23 degrees Celsius 【原文】Radio Announcer: You’re listening to Radio Metro. It’s two minutes to nine, and time for the latest weather for cast from Dan Francis at the London Weather Centre. Francis: Hello. It's been another warm and fine day for most of us. Temperatures in southeast England reached 26 degrees Celsius by mid-afternoon, and Brighton had 15 hours of lovely sunshine. Further north it was a little cooler with maximum temperatures of around 21 degrees in southern Scotland, and in the far northwest of Scotland there were some light showers around midday. But the rest of the country, as I said, has been warm and dry with temperatures in the Midlands reaching 23 degrees Celsius by early afternoon though it was a little cooler along the west coast and in Northern Ireland. But already the weather is beginning to change, I'm afraid, and during the night showers will slowly move in from the Atlantic to reach south-west England and the southern coast of Wales by early morning.The rest of the country will have a very mild, dry night with minimum temperatures no lower than 15 degrees in the south, a little cooler — 11degrees or so —in the north. Any remaining showers in northwest Scotland will pass quickly to leave a mild, dry night there too.And now the outlook for Friday and the weekend. Well, southern Europe will, once again, get the best of the weekend weather, and if your holiday starts this weekend, then southern Spain is the place to go, with temperatures of 34 degrees along the Mediterranean coast. At the eastern end of the Med, too, you can expect uninterrupted sunshine and temperatures of up to 32 degrees Celsius in Greece and southeast Italy, but further north the weather's not so settled. Much of France, Belgium and the Netherlands will be cloudy with occasional rain, and maximum temperatures will be around 22 degrees — very disappointing for this time of the year.Scotland and Northern Ireland will have heavy rain for much of the weekend and temperatures will drop to a cool 17 degrees. Across most of England the weather will be cloudy but mainly dry with sunny periods. And when the sun does come out, temperatures could rise to a maximum of 23 degrees.Task 8【答案】【原文】As the air pressure around you either rises or falls, many changes in nature occur. Most of these are very obvious changes while others are of a more subtle nature.Mountains and other far away objects will appear to be much closer and more sharply focused as wet weather approaches and the air pressure drops. The dust particles in the air begin to settle to the ground and the air clears, allowing you to see more details of faraway objects. As a high pressure front approaches and the air becomes “thicker,” more dust particles become suspended in air and things take on their normal somewhat hazy appearance.“Sharp horns on the moon threaten bad weather.” This and a bright, clear moon are good indicators that wet weather is on the way. As the air clears of dust particles ahead of a low pressure system, the moon appears to come closer and be more sharply focused due to the lack of dust.Sound also becomes sharper and more focused prior to stormy weather. Instead of traveling upward and outward into the atmosphere sound waves are bent back to the earth and their range extended. Bird calls sound sharper, and, at my house, we can hear the blowing of the train horn as it rumbles through the valley below.If you find yourself out in a marsh or swamp and the air really seems to stink more than normal, expect rainy weather. This happens when the pressure drops and the methane trapped on the bottom of the swamp is released in greater quantities. In reverse, as fair weather approaches and the pressure rises, things won't smell quite so strong.Birds and bats have a tendency to fly much lower to the ground right before a rain due to the “thinning” of the air. They prefer to fly where the air is the most dense and they can get greater lift with their wings. With high pressure and dry air, the atmosphere becomes denser and they can easily fly at higher altitudes.Smoke rising straight into the air means fair weather and smoke hanging low meansrain is on the way. This is pretty much the same as with the birds and methane in the swamp. When high pressure approaches, smoke will rise whereas with low pressure it can't rise and tends to lay low.Remember a grandparent talking about how their corns, bunions, or joints ached right before a rain? Again, this is due to the decreasing atmospheric pressure allowing the gas in our bodies to expand.Task 9【答案】A. Statements 3, 6, 7 are true.B.f—c—a—d—b—eC.1) F 2) T 3) F 4) FD.1) d 2) b【原文】It was 1974. Richard Nixon was still president. Kidnapped heiress Patty Hearst was still missing. In Xenia, a pretty spot of 25,000 people amid fields of soybeans and corn, American Graffiti was held over at the Cinema. The Xenia Hotel offered a chicken and dumpling dinner for $, but everyone flocked to the A&W drive-in for burgers and root beer floats. That's where five of the bodies were found after the storm.In all, 33 people died in Xenia's tornado, the deadliest of 148 storms that raged through 13 states during the infamous "Super Outbreak'' of tornadoes April 3 to 4, 1974. In 16 hours and 10 minutes, 330 people were killed and nearly 5,550 were injured from Illinois to Georgia.Though the Xenia death toll has been matched by other killer storms, the degree of devastation makes the city's tornado among U.S. history's most destructive. The storm still is studied in colleges by aspiring meteorologists, a textbook case of a rare Category F-5, the most intense of tornadoes.On that fateful day, I was a young boy of 8 years old. We lived in the Arrowhead Subdivision. That afternoon I was around the corner playing with some neighbor kids.I thought I could hear my father calling me, so I ran back to the house. Thinking back now, there is no way I would have been able to hear him. I was too far away for a voice to have traveled in the afternoon noise. Besides, Dad had a very bad case of tonsillitis that day. Like I was saying, I went back home and got through the door just in time to answer the ringing phone. On the other end of the phone was my Mother. Mom was working. She told me she heard a bad storm was on the way. She told me to make sure the garage door was shut and to stay inside. After I hung up the phone, I settled down to watch The Dennis Show. To this day I can vividly remember the electricity going out. I looked out the large window in the living room and didn't have a clue as to what I was looking at.Dad was asleep on the couch, so I woke him up to look. Dad looked and said to get into the bathroom. We sat on the floor. Dad had his back to the door and hisfeet pushing against the wall opposite the door. I remember that as soon as we sat down, the windows broke. Glass blew under the door, and the sound was tremendous.I know it really didn’t take too long for the tornado to go past, but I do remember the conversation we had in the process. I could feel the cool air rushing under the floor through the crawlspace vents. I asked if we were flying. He said he wasn't sure, but he didn't think we were. He said the house was tearing apart. I asked him how he knew. He said he just knew it was.When things calmed down, we opened the door. The odd feeling I had, looking up the street from inside what once was my hallway, is still with me today.I think back often to that day. I think back and wonder what would have happened if my Dad hadn't been sick that day. Like a lot of kids, I stayed home by myself after school back then. I seriously doubt I would be able to tell you my story, if I had been alone that day. I still live in Xenia and wouldn’t trade this town for any other.Task 10【原文】Undoubtedly, Tibet is one of the harshest places for human existence. It is cool in summer but freezing cold in winter. In Lhasa, the mildest city temperature may exceed 29C in summer while plummeting to -16C in winter! Sun radiation is extremely strong in Tibet. The sunlight in Lhasa is so intense that the city is called Sunlight City. The thin air can neither block off nor retain heat so that the temperature extremes can be met in daytime and the same night respectively in Tibet. However it is not impossible to visit the holy snow land. April to October is the best time to visit Tibet, out of the coldest months, which are from December to February usually. The average temperature in north Tibet is subzero and winter arrives in October until the following May or June. July and August are the best time to visit the area, enjoying warm temperature, intense sunshine, beautiful scenery and festive events. May, June and September is the tourist season in east Tibet. In winter, roads are all blocked by heavy snow. Landslides and rock falls frequently occur, which will make travel difficult.。

《现代大学英语听力》听力原文及题目答案Unit

《现代大学英语听力》听力原文及题目答案Unit

I had two months until my new job began. It was like waiting an entire summer for school to start. I spent those two months talking to figure skating coaches and judges. I read boring rule books. I drove to the rinks where the skaters trained, and made notes about our conversations. I even took a lesson, which made some of the skaters laugh.Unit 6Task 1【答案】A.[d]—[b]—[a]—[e]—[c]B.a【原文】Laura usually leaves the offices of Quest Productions at about 5 o'clock, but last Monday she left at 5:30. She wanted to get home by 6:30 and she ran to the bus stop but she couldn't get on a bus. There were too many people and not enough buses. Laura was desperate to get home so she decided to go by tube.In the station she went to one of the automatic ticket machines but she didn't have enough change, so she had to join the queue at the ticket window. She bought her ticket and ran to the escalator. Laura went to the platform and waited for the tube. It arrived andthe crowd moved forward.Laura was pushed into the train. It was almost full but she was given a seat by a man with a moustache. Laura thanked him and sat down. She started to read her newspaper. In the tunnel the train stopped suddenly and Laura was thrown to the floor together with the man with the moustache. Somebody screamed. The lights went out. It was quarter past 6 on a cold, wet December evening.Task 2【答案】A.1) a 2) b 3) d 4) cB.1) T 2) T 3) FC.wondered; television plays; exciting; every cigarette lighter; tape recorder; held in a certain way; the touch of a gold ring against the hand of; reveal; How wrong they were【原文】X was a secret agent. He had rented a furnished room in a provincial town not far from the public park and had been there two weeks. He was standing at the window looking out at the dull beds of geraniums, the park gates and the cold, uninviting statue of QueenVictoria that stood across the street from him, It was raining hard and the few people who passed by looked wet and miserable. X was miserable, too. How, he wondered, could anybody think there was anything interesting about the life of a secret agent He knew it was because people had seen so many television plays about glamorous spies that they thought the life of a secret agent was exciting. They were convinced that every cigarette lighter concealed a secret tape recorder; that a fountain pen held in a certain way would open a locked door, that the touch of a gold ring against the hand of an enemy would make him reveal all his secrets. How wrong they were! He looked round his room. The wallpaper was in the worst possible taste, the pictures horrible, the carpet worn, dirty and faded; and he was cold. This was the third Monday he had come to the window to look out. He prayed it would be the last.As if in answer to his prayer, a certain meeting he had been sent to investigate was about to take place. He took out his camera. Just beneath the statue two women had stopped to speak. He knew one of them, and it was she who pointed in his direction. The other woman looked up towards him and in that brief moment he photographed her.Task 3【答案】A.B.1) a 2) b 3) c 4) b 5) d【原文】Harry: Well, Robert, have you made up your mind yet what you want to do when you leave collegeNora: Oh Harry. Surely he's a bit young to decide on his career. He hasn't even got to college yet.Harry: Not at all, Nora. It's wisest to decide in good time. Look at me, for example. I really wanted to be a sailor, but nowI spend my days sitting at a desk in an office. Yes, it's sillyto train for the wrong job. And after all, Robert will be going to college soon.Nora: Now if I were a man I'd be a farmer. To see the crops growing--that's my idea of a good life.Harry: Yes, and to see the money rolling in is more important still. Robert: Well, that's not the way I look at it, Dad. It's the job I care about, not the money.Harry: Maybe not; but you'll learn to care about the money too, when you've got a family to keep.Nora: And of course Peter —well, he's keen to be a racing driver, or else an explorer.Robert: Oh, Peter's not old enough to make up his mind about such things.Harry: You haven't answered my question yet, Robert. What would you like to doNora: Are you sure you don't want to be a farmer, Robert Or a market gardenerRobert: No, I'm sorry Mum, but I don't want to at all. I'd rather be a civil engineer. I want to build roads and bridges.Harry: Not ships Isn't it better to be a shipbuilding engineer Robert: Look here, is it my career we're planning, or yoursHarry: All fight, all right, there's no need to lose your temper.But you'd better win that scholarship first.Task 4【答案】I. correspondents; columnistA. may not need eitherB. to go to places where events take place and write stories aboutthemII. first; bigger; better; who will soon leave to work for other peopleIII. working hours; free time; work long hours to begin with【原文】Here are some of the things a young man or woman should not do when he first asks an editor for a job:He should not tell the editor that he wants to be a foreign correspondent or a columnist. Very probably the editor does not need either. He wants a reporter who will go to such places as government offices and police stations and write a true story of what is happening there. Being a foreign correspondent or a columnist will come later.A young person should not tell tile editor that newspaper work is only the first step on the way to bigger and better jobs, such as those in government. The editor must take a lot of time and trouble teaching someone to be a good newspaperman or woman. He does not like the idea of teaching people who are soon going to leave him to work for someone else.A young journalist should accept the working hours and free time the editor gives him. As a new journalist, it is very probable that he will work longer hours than others and work on weekends.The editor did the same when he was a young newspaperman with no experience. He expects a journalist to understand how things are on a newspaper.Task 5【答案】A.1) acd 2) abeB.1) she is the wrong sex 2) she wears the wrong clothes【原文】SYLVIA: We've got a new manager in our department.LARRY: Oh You hoped to get that job, didn't you?SYLVIA: Yes, I did.LARRY: I'm sorry. That's too bad. Who is it Who got the job, I mean?SYLVIA: Someone called Drexler. Carl Drexler. He's been with the company only two years. I've been here longer. And I know more about the job, too!LARRY: Hmm. Why do you think they gave it to him and not to you?SYLVIA: Because I'm the wrong sex, of course !LARRY: You mean you didn't get the job because you're a woman?SYLVIA: Yes, that was probably it! It isn't fair.LARRY: What sort of clothes does he wear?SYLVTA: A dark suit. White shirt. A tie. Why?LARRY: Perhaps that had something to do with it.SYLVIA: You mean you think I didn't get the job because I come to work in jeans and a sweater?LARRY: It's possible, isn't it?SYLVIA: Do you really think I should wear different clothes?LARRY: Well. . . perhaps you should think about it.SYLVTA: Why should I wear a skirt Or a dress?LARRY: I'm not saying you should. I'm saying you should think about it. That's all!SYLVIA: Why should I do that I'm good at my job! That's the only important thing!LARRY: Hmm. Perhaps it should be the only important thing. But it isn't. Not inthis company.Task 6【答案】A.B.1st speaker(bcd) 2nd speaker(ae)C.1) F 2) F【原文】Al: Is this the right line to file a claimBob: Yeah. It's the same line for everything. You just stand here and wait.Al: Oh. Is there always such a long lineBob: Every week. Sometimes longer. Is this your first time here Al: Yes.Bob: What happened Your plant closed downAl: No. I'm a car salesman, or, I was a car salesman. But we just aren't selling cars. It's the interest rates. Two years ago,I averaged ten new cars a month. Do you know how many cars Isold last month One. One car to a lady who had the cash. But the interest rates are up again. The boss let three of us go.How about youBob: I worked at a vacuum cleaner plant with about fifty workers.We put in a good day's work. But the machinery was getting old.As a matter of fact, the whole plant was old. So the management decided to build a new plant. You know where In Singapore. The workers here made about seven dollars an hour, a couple of people made eight or nine an hour. You know how much they're paying the workers in Singapore $ an hour! Anyway, all fifty of us got laid off.Al: How long ago was thatBob: They closed down ten months ago.Al: Any luck finding another jobBob: Nothing. I have one, sometimes two, interviews a week. Last week I thought I had something. They liked my experience with machines. But I never heard from them again.Al: At least you know something about machines. All I can do is talk.Bob: Maybe you'll talk yourself into another job. Good luck. I'll see you here next week.Al: I hope not. I hope I'll have something by then.Task 7【答案】A.1) F 2) F 3) T 4) F 5) T 6) FB.1) According to the first speaker, it is frustrating because the teacher cannot see clearly the results of his efforts.2) According to the second speaker, English language teaching isa good job, because it guarantees a stable income and regular working hours and means less pressure. He also likes the way elderly teacher are.【原文】Interviewer: Do you prefer what you're doing to teaching?John Smith: Yes, one of the things I found a bit frustrating about teaching was that it was rather,very intangible than um, especially if you're teaching in England and most of the students know quite a lot of English before they arrive. They learn a lot of English outside the classroom, in pubs or coffee shops or other places, with the families they're living with. It's very difficult to pin down how much they learn from your actual lesson, whereas in marketing um, again there are lots of areas that are gray rather than black or white, but there are quite a few other areas where one can see quite clearly the results of one's efforts.Interviewer: What did you do after you quit your job in advertising Second Man: In fact, I became a journalist and I worked as a freelance.I didn't have a full-time job with any newspaper. I justhad to contribute things as they came along and 1 wrotefor magazines, and I did quite a lot of broadcasting forthe VOA. Well, this was in a way the opposite ofadvertising because I enjoyed it a lot but I found itvery hard to earn enough money to live on.Interviewer: And then you decided to be a teacherSecond Man: Well, and so I thought. Well, I must do something which produces an income that I can be sure of. While I wasworking as a journalist I had done an article for amagazine about the English language teaching world andm fact I had come to the school where I now teach as ajournalist and interviewed a lot of the people. And Ithought it seemed a very nice place and I thought thatthe classes I visited had a very, very nice feeling aboutthem, and so I thought, well, I'll see if they'll haveme.Interviewer: Why do you prefer teaching to advertisingSecond Man: Well, partly because in teaching you work regular hours.It I advertising you just had to stay at the office untilthe work was finished [I see.] and it could be threeo'clock in the morning. [Oh, dean] Also you were veryoften made to work at weekends. Often some job would comeup that was very important and they said it had to befinished — it had to go into the newspapers next week. Interviewer: So there was a lot mom pressure.Second Man: There was a lot more pressure in advertising. Also, the people I worked with when I was first in advertising wereyoung hopeful people like myself. By the end I wasworking with a lot of old people who quite honestly wereawful. And I kept looking at them and saying, "Am I goingto be like that" And I thought if I am I'd better getout, whereas the English language teachers I saw, whowere older people I thought, well, they seemed quite nice.And I wouldn't mind being like that myself.Task 8【答案】The interview with Michale:The interview with Chris:【原文】Matthew:?? Michael, do you go out to workMichael:?? Not regularly, no. I... I used to; I used to have a job in a publishing company, but Idecided it wasn't really what I wanted to do and that what I wanted to do wouldn't earn me much money, so I gave up working and luckily I had a private income from my family to support me and now I do the things I want to do. Some of them get paid like lecturing and teaching, and others don't.Matthew: What are the advantages of not having to go to work from nine till fiveMichael: Ah... there' re two advantages really. One is that if you feel tired you don't have to get up, and the other is that you can spend your time doing things you want to do rather than being forced to do the same thing all the time.Matthew: But surely that's in a sense very self-indulgent and verylucky because most of us have to go out and earn our livings.Do you feel justified in having this privileged position Michael: Yes, because I think I use it well. I do things which I think are useful to people and the community and which I enjoy doing.Matthew: Chris, what do you think the value of work isChris: Well, I think in our present-day society, for most people, work has very little value at all. Most of us go out to work for about eight to nine hours of our working day. We do things which are either totally futile and totally useless or have very little justification whatsoever, and for most of us the only reason for working is that we need to keep ourselves alive, to pay for somewhere to live, to pay to feed our children. Matthew: But surely people wouldn't know what to do if they didn't have to go to workChris: Well, again this raises the sort of two main aspects of work.Should we think of 'work only as a sort of bread-winning process, and this is very much the role it has in current society, or should we take a much wider perspective on work and think of all the possible sort of activities that human beings could be doing during the day I think the sort of distinction currently is between say, someone who works in acar factory and who produces cars which are just adding to pollution, to over-consumption of vital resources, who is doing something which is very harmful, both to our environment and to, probably society, to contrast his work with someone perhaps like a doctor, who I think in any society could be justified as doing a very valuable job and one which incidentally is satisfying to the person who is doing it. Matthew: What do you do Is your job just a breadwinning process or do you get some satisfaction out of doing itChris: Well, in the job I do find that most of the satisfaction is a mental one; it's coming to grips with the problems of my subject and with the problems of teaching in the University.Clearly this is the type of satisfaction that most people doing what we call in England "white-collar" jobs. This is quite different from the sort of craftsman, who is either working that his hands or with his skills on a machine, or from people perhaps who are using artistic skills, which are of a quite different character. Certainly it's becoming a phenomena that people who do "white-collar jobs during the day, who work with their minds to some extent, people who work on computers, people who are office clerks, bank employees, these people have fairly soul-destroying jobs which nevertheless don'tinvolve much physical effort, that they tend to come home and do "do-it-yourself" activities at home. They make cupboard, paint their houses, repair their cars, which somehow provide the sort of physical job satisfaction that they're denied in their working day.Task 9【答案】A.B.1) No major change. For some→“less paperwork”Some:→less working hoursOthers:→earn more money.2) Most adults→would go on working.Esp. young adults (18 to 24)→9 out of 10 would go on working【原文】Are most workers today feeling bored and dissatisfied with their jobs It is often claimed that they are. Yet a study conducted by Parade magazine more than 20 years ago showed that people at that time felt the opposite.Parade asked questions of a representative sampling of adult Americans from coast to coast. The sampling included different sexes, age groups, and occupations.The interviewees were asked to make a choice from one of the following three to describe their feelings towards their work.A. Like their jobs.B. Dislike their jobs.C. Like their jobs in part,Results showed that 91 percent of the male interviewees and 84 percent of the females chose A, while only 5 percent men and 12 percent women interviewed chose B. The rest said that they liked their jobs in part and they comprised a very tow percentage.In all the three age groups — from 18 to 24, from 25 to 29 and 30 to 39 — those who liked theirjobs made up the majority. 70 percent, 88 percent and 92 percent respectively choose A. Those choosing B accounted for 20 percent, 9 percent and 8 percent of different age groups. And the rest, 6 percent, 3 percent and 0 percent respectively claimed that they only liked their jobs in part.The difference in responses among people with different occupations is small. Among the white-collar employees, those choosing A, B and C are 87 percent, 8 percent and 4 percent of the total. And for the blue-collar employees, 91 percent, 5 percent and 3 percent choose A, B and C respectively.It is interesting to note that there are few differences in attitude between men and women, professionals and factory workers. In each group, the largest number reported that they liked their jobs.Next, Parade asked, "If there were one thing you could change about your job, what would it be" It was expected that many would wish to make their jobs less boring, but very few gave this reply. No major changes were reported. Some wished for "less paperwork"; many would shorten their working hours, but others would like more hours in order to earn more money. No serious complaints were made.Most people have to work in order to live. But what would happen if someone had enough money to stop working Parade asked, "If you inherited a million dollars, would you go on working — either at your present job or something you liked better--or would you quit work" The answers showed that most adults would prefer to work, even if they didn't have to. This is true especially of the younger adults aged 18-24. Of these, nine out often said they would go on working, even if they suddenly became millionaires.Task 10【答案】A.B.1) F 2) TC.1) b 2) aD.1. She really enjoyed meeting new people.2. She had good qualifications in English and Maths.3. She did not mind hard work, even if it was not always pleasant.4. She liked living away form home.【原文】Officer: Come in, please take a seat. I'm the careers officer. You're Cathy, aren't you?Mother: That's right. This is Catherine Hunt, and I'm her mother. Officer: How do you do, Mrs. Hunt Hello, Catherine.Cathy: Hello. Pleased to meet you.Officer: And you'd like some advice about choosing a career- Mother: Yes, she would. Wouldn't you, Catherine?Cathy: Yes, please.Officer: Well, just let me ask a few questions to begin with. How old are you, Catherine?Mother: She's nineteen. Well, she's almost nineteen.Officer: And what qualifications have you got?Mother: Well, qualifications from school, of course. Very good results she got. And she got certificates for ballet and for playing the piano.Officer: Is that what you're interested in, Catherine, dancing andmusicCathy: Well...Mother: Ever since she was a little girl, she's been very keen on music and dancing. She ought tobe a music teacher or something. She's quite willing to train for a few more years to get the right job, aren't you, Catherine Cathy: Well, if it's a good idea.Mother: There you are, you see. She's a good girl really, a bit lazy and disorganized sometimes,but she's very bright. I'm sure the careers officer will have lots of jobs for you.Officer: Well, I'm afraid it's not as easy as that. There are many young people these days who can'tfind the job they want.Mother: I told you, Catherine. I told you, you shouldn't wear that dress. You have to look smart toget a job these days.Officer: I think she looks very nice. Mrs. Hunt, will you come into the other office for a momentand look at some of the information we have there. I'm sure you'd like to see how we can help young people.Mother: Yes, I'd love to. Mind you, I think Catherine would be anice teacher. She could work with young children. She'd like that. Or she could be a vet. She's always looking after sick animals.Officer: I'm afraid there's a lot of competition. You need very good results to be a vet. This way, Mrs. Hunt. Just wait a minute, Catherine.(The mother exits.)Officer: There are just one or two more things, Catherine. Cathy: Do call me Cathy.Officer: OK, Cathy. Are you really interested in being a vet Cathy: Not really. Anyway, I'm not bright enough. I'm reasonably intelligent, but I'm not brilliant. I'm afraid my mother isa bit over-optimistic.Officer: Yes, I guessed that. She's a bit overpowering, isn't she, your mumCathy: A bit. But she's very kind.Officer: I'm sure she is. So, you're interested in ballet and music, are youCathy: Not really. My mother sent me to lessons when I was six, so I'm quite good, I suppose. But I don't think I want to do that for the rest of my life, especially music. It's so lonely. Officer: What do you enjoy doingCathy: Well, I like playing tennis, and swimming. Oh, I went to France with the school choir last year. I really enjoyed that.And I like talking to people. But I suppose you mean real interests — things that would help me to get a job Officer: No. I'm more interested in what you really want to do. You like talking to people, do youCathy: Oh yes, I really enjoy meeting new people.Officer: Do you think you would enjoy teachingCathy: No, no, I don't really. I was never very interested in school work, and I'd like to do something different. Anyway, there'sa teacher training college very near us. It would be just likegoing to school again.Officer: So you don't want to go on trainingCathy: Oh, I wouldn't mind at all, not for something useful. I wondered about being a hairdresser —you meet lots of people, and you learn to do something properly—but I don't know. It doesn't seem very worthwhile.Officer: What about nursingCathy: Nursing In a hospital Oh, I couldn't do that, I'm not good enough.Officer: Yes, you are. You've got good qualifications in English and Maths. But it is very hard work.Cathy: Oh, I don't mind that.Officer: And it's not very pleasant sometimes.Cathy: That doesn't worry me either. Mum's right. I do look after sick animals. I looked after our dog when it was run over bya car. My mother was sick, but I didn't mind. I was too worriedabout the dog. Do you really think I could be a nurse Officer: I think you could be a very good nurse. You'd have to leave home, of course.Cathy: I rather think I should enjoy that.Officer: Well, don't decide all at once. Here's some information about one or two other things which might suit you. Have a look through it before you make up your mind.Task 11【原文】I began my career during college, reporting on news stories ata Toronto radio station. The station’s program manager was also a professor who taught one of my classes. I convinced him that she needed a youth reporter because that year was International Youth Year. After graduation, I took a job as a television news reporter and later, news anchor. But sports reporting was something different, so I decided to try it. Figure skating was my first assignment.I had two months until my new job began. It was like waitingan entire summer for school to start. I spent those two months talking to figure skating coaches and judges. I read boring rule books. I drove to the rinks where the skaters trained, and made notes about our conversations. I even took a lesson, which made some of the skaters laugh.。

现代大学英语听力1原文加答案Unit

现代大学英语听力1原文加答案Unit

Unit 14Task 1【原文】A reporter is interviewing some people about unusual sports.Interviewer: Hello, Andrea. I’ve just been watching you skiing. You’re really very good, aren’t you? Very fast indeed.Andrea: Thank you. I do teach skiing, you know, so I have to be good. But nowI also have to be very fast, because I’ve been selected for the Olympicteam and I’m traini ng for the Olympic Games next year.Interviewer: Photos, water sports are your work — water skiing, parasailing. Do you still enjoy them?Photos: Oh yes, I love water skiing particularly, but some days, when it’s raining, there’s nothing to do. So I’m learning to play chess in my sparetime. It’s a nice game, you know.Interviewer: And Yannis, how old are you?Yannis: I’m fifteen. I’m on holiday at the moment and I’m helping my brother.I’m learning to drive the boat. But I live in Athens with my family.I’m a student there.Interviewer: Claude, you look very fit. How old are you?Claude: I’m fifty now. I own this windsurfing club, but I’m also the club manager. I windsurf a lot and I meet a lot of British and Canadians,so I’m studying English twice a week — in the evenings. Interviewer: Stewart, you are from Scotland, aren’t you?Stewart: Yes, I’m a bank m anager in Aberdeen. But as you know, I go underwater caving. I want to go to Borneo next summer. But it’s a very dangeroussport so I’m practicing diving every weekend, at the moment.Task 2【答案】1) b, 2) Lift the club backwards away from the ball; keeping left arm straight till you get to the top of the wing; keep your head down; keep looking at the ball; swing down; hit the ball; throw that club towards the hole.3) c, 4) Bend your knees; thrust your hands back; go into the water; make your heads follow, go straight in and your legs follow; put your hands back, behind your back.5) c, 6) Take your left hand; get some hair on its neck; get a good firm hold; lift your left leg; put it in the stirrup; hang on tight with your left hand onto the hair; your toes are facing towards its back; put your other hand on the back of thesaddle; swing your leg overthe back.【原文】Extract 1:Steve: Lift the club backwards away from the ball. That’s it. Keeping that left arm straight.Fern: It’s not easy.Steve: ...till you get to the top of the wing. [Yeah.]Good. Now the very important thing — you must keep your head down all the time.Fern: Down?Steve: Yes, keep looking at the ball.Fern: Oh, but I’m looking at the club.Steve: No. You must look at the ball. That’s it. Right, now...Fern: It’s not a very natural position, is it?Steve: Well, now swing down. [Yes.] that’s it... swing down and through keeping that left arm straight [Yes.] and even when you... even after you’ve hit the ball, you must keep that head looking at where the ball was. Yes.Fern: It doesn’t seem right to me!Steve: No, no. You’re doing really well. That’s OK.Fern: It’s not easy, is it?Steve: And after you’ve hit the ball, keep looking at where the ball was but make sure you throw that club towards the hole.Fern: That’s not going to be difficult at all. I’ve almost let go several times. Steve: You mustn’t let go. I mean you must just point the club towards the hole. Fern: Yes, that’s why I’m looking in that direction so I can check where it’s gone... hasn’t gone very fast actually.Steve: Good. You’ll be really good.Extract 2:Tom: Am I standing in the right position?Ruth: Well, you’ve got to bend your knees a bit more, and thrust your hands back, so when you go into the water, you make your heads follow, er... go straight in and your legs follow.Tom: Is this OK?Ruth: Yes, that’s just...yes, that’s just about right and bend your knees a little bit more.Tom: Does...? This all right now?Ruth: Yes, that’s fine. Now, put your hands back, behind your back. OK? Nice and straight...Yes, that’s it, and then, make it... now, go on, go! Make your head go straight in and your, erm...legs follow.Extract 3:Jackie: Lesley, I don’t think it likes me?Lesley: Oh, never mind Jackie, now relax. Now take a deep breath all right, because it can sense if you’re nervous. [OK.] All right? Now, you feeling OK? [Yes, jolly good.] Now, take your left hand, [Mm-mm] and get some hair on its neck.., get a good firm hold. [OK.] Now, can you lift your left leg and put it in thestirrup... you put your foot in the stirrup. [My left leg.] OK? Yes. Hang on tight with your left hand on...[Uhhum.] onto the hair. OK? [Right.] And put your left foot in the stirrup.Jackie: Fine. So my toes are pointing forwards?Lesley: No, your toes are facing towards its back... end. All right? [OK.] OK? Right, now, can you hop round [Mm-mm.] so that you’re facing its middle [Mm-mm.] alright? And put your other hand on the back of the saddle. [Fine.] OK? Feeling comfortable? [Yes.] OK. Now, you’ve got to take a big jump, and you’ve got to swing your leg over the back, but don’t kick it, because it’ll be frightened. [Uh-huh-huh-huh.] OK?Jackie: It’ll be frightened? OK, here we go.Task 3【答案】1) a, 2) c, 3) a, 4) b, 5) b【原文】Man: Honey, the basketball game is about to start. And could you bring some chips and a bowl of ice cream? And... uh... a slice of pizza from the fridge. Woman: Anything else?Man: Nope, that’s all for now. Hey, honey, you know, they’re organizing a company basketball team, and I’m thinking about joining. What do you think? Woman: Humph.Man: “Humph!” what do you mean “Humph?” I was the star player in high school. Woman: Yeah, twenty-five years ago. Look, I just don’t want you having a heart attack running up and down the court.Man: So, what are you suggesting? Should I just abandon the idea? I’m not that out of shape.Woman: Well... you ought to at least have a physical before you begin. I mean, it has been at least five years since you played at all.Man: Well, OK, but...Woman: And you need to watch your diet and cut back on the fatty foods, like ice cream. And you should try eating more fresh fruits and vegetables.Man: Yeah, you’re probably right.Woman: And you should take up a little weight training to strengthen your muscles or perhaps try cycling to build up your cardiovascular system. Oh, and you need to go to bed early instead of watching TV half the night.Man: Hey, you’re starting to sound like my personal fitness instructor. Woman: No, I just love you, and I want you to be around for a long, long time.Task 4【答案】1) T, 2) T, 3) F, 4) F, 5) F, 6) T, 7) F, 8) F【原文】Mal c: Bye, Mum, we’re off.Mum: Off where?Boy: Break dancing.Mum: Break dancing? Whatever’s that?Mal c: It’s great.Boy: Yeah, i t’s great.Mum: I daresay it is. But what is it?Malc: It’s break dancing. You dance on your shoulders and on your back and on your head when you are good enough.Mum: It doesn’t sound much like dancing to me.Boy: It is. It’s great!Malc: Yeah.Mum: More like some competition in the Olympic Games.Malc: Yeah. It’s good exercise. Keeps you fit. But not like school athletics. It’s great.Mum: And where are you off to do your break dancing?Malc: Oh, we do it in the street. Anywhere! You don’t have to go to a dance hall to do it. You just do it — where you feel like it.Boy: It’s great.Mum: But you can’t just start dancing in the street like that.Boy: Why not? We take the portable cassette recorder and when we find a nice street, we turn the music up really loud and start dancing.Mum: And don’t the neighbours and police complain?Malc: No. They’re too interested watching us dance.Mum: On your back, shoulders and heads? I see. It sounds fascinating, I must say.I’m not surprised they watch. Very amusing.Boy: Yeah, it’s great. We have competitions to see who can do it the fastest without falling over. Malc’s the winner so far.Malc: Yeah, I’m the best. I teach the others but they can’t do it like me yet. Mum: I suppose that explains the conditions of your clothes lately.Boy: What do you mean, Mum?Mum: All these tears and holes I’ve suddenly been noticing in unusual places. That explains it. If you’re dancing on your shoulders and backs, you’ll be wearing your hair out next, I suppose.Malc: On, come on, Mum. It’s great.Mum: Oh well, off you go. But in future wear all your old pullovers and shirts, will you? It’s not very great sitting up late at night sewing up holes in your new ones. Go on, off with you.Task 5【答案】1) c, 2) a, 3) c, 4) b, 5) b【原文】Hello everybody, and welcome back to a thrilling game at the Tokyo Dome with the US Team taking a drumming at the hands of the Japanese national team going into the second half, 51 to 26. The US Dream Team is made up of NBA veterans —supposedly the best we have to offer —but they need a miracle to dig themselves out of a hole and come back at this point.Unfortunately for the Dream Team, their leading scorer, High-Fly Wilson, was ejected one minute into the second quarter after climbing into the stands and fighting with a spectator who had continually heckled Wilson for shooting three airballs in a row.Another unuaual moment came late in the second quarter when the Japanese center, Tomohiro Suzuki, suffered a concussion and was knocked out cold as he lunged for a ball and collided with the knee of one of his own teammates. There also have been several other injuries, including the loss of starting forward, Masa Harada.Some of the coaches on the US team are attributing the team’s slow performance to some raw fish they had last night while attending a banquet in their honor. Next thing we’ll know, they’ll be blaming their players’ cement hands on a demonstration class on Japanese paper folding earlier in the week. Who knows what’ll be next?OK, it looks like we’re ready for the second half.Task 6【答案】A.80 hectares, 470,000 square meters, 17,600, 760-hectare, 14, 15, less than a 30-minute driveB.1) It is located in the western part of the Village and consists of apartment buildings, dining halls, and other facilities.2) It is located in the eastern part of the Village and will provide leisure facilities and cultural activities for athletes.3) After the Games, it will become a residential area.【原文】Olympic VillageWith a land area of 80 hectares and a total building floor area of 470,000 square meters, the Olympic Village, located within the Olympic Green, will accommodate 17,600 athletes and team officials. A 760-hectare “Forest Park” will also be created within the Olympic Village.14 venues will be used to hold 15 sporting events within the Olympic Green. These venues are in walking distance from the Olympic Village. All other Olympic venues in Beijing will be less than a 30-minute drive from the Village.The Olympic Village will provide safe and comfortable facilities to help athletes achieve their peak performance during the Games. The Residential Quarter located in the western part of the Village consists of apartment buildings, dining halls, and other facilities. The International Quarter located in the eastern part of the Village will provide leisure facilities and cultural activities for athletes. After the Games, the Village will become a residential area.Task 7【答案】1) The sheer physical nature of football.2) The physical movement of the man: a man who can jump to a height and then getthe power behind a ball with his head.3) Well-timed tackle and a ball hit well on the run.4) When you’ve played the game yourself, you can real ly appreciate the skillsinvolved.【原文】Two football enthusiasts talk about what they appreciate about the game.Interviewer: When you… when you go to a match, what do you actually look for?Is it the movement, is it the tactics? What I... or is it just thesheer...1st enthusiast: I think...Interviewer: Sheer exercise? The activity?1st enthusiast: For me it’s the… it’s the sheer physical…erm… the whole, thephysical nature of the thing, you know. Interviewer: Uhm.1st enthusiast: For me, I... I like nothing better than to admire a good FirstDivision side running out onto the pitch and you look at these men andtheir physical condition, every muscle in their body is completely tonedup, you know. And these men are running and I mean running for ninetyminutes.Interviewer: Um.1st enthusiast: And they are really… the... 1 think there is a beauty in it.Interviewer: Uhm?1st enthusiast: The... the physical movement of the man… a man who can jump to aheight and then get the power behind a ball with his head.Interviewer: Uhum?1st enthusiast: Which I can just about get out of kicking a ball with my foot.Interviewer: Uhum?1st enthusiast: You know, that is the enjoyment for me.2nd enthusiast: Or a well-timed tackle.1st enthusiast: Yes.2nd enthusiast: Or a... a ball hit well on the run.Interviewer: Uhum.2nd enthusiast: These are skills which have to be learned over a number of years.Interviewer: Yes, uhum.2nd enthusiast: And then of course, you have players who are gifted.Interviewer: Uhum.2nd enthusiast: The skills come almost natural to them. And it’s a b... it’s abeautiful thing to... to see a really professional footballer inaction.Interviewer: Uhum.2nd enthusiast: Just striking the ball. But...but it’s only when you’ve p layedthe game yourself I think, that you can really appreciate.Interviewer: Um.2nd enthusiast: The skills involved.Interviewer: Um.Task 8【答案】1) It is as tiring as it is playing the game itself.2) The tension is released and the tremendous energy is thrown out.3) When a goal is scored, it gives the opportunity to get rid of a lot of your aggressive feelings.4) Because wild behaviour is news and good behavior isn’t.5) It probably contributes to the violence on the terraces.【原文】What’s it like being at a football match? The two enthusiasts talked about this and violence in football crowds.Interviewer: So, ...a...a...a typical match... i... i... is a very tense tense... 2nd enthusiast: Oh, yes.Interviewer: Affair, isn’t it?2nd enthusiast: Oh, yes.1st enthusiast: I... in fact, it’s a very…sorry... it’s... a... it’s... a... er...almost tiring being a supporter.Interviewer: Uhm?1st enthusiast: As it is... erm... playing the game itself.Interviewer: Um.1st enthusiast: Er... live f ootball for me is... is... is one of the most…er...stimulating experiences for...emotional sort of build-up and strain. Interviewer: Um.1st enthusiast: You know. The feeling when the ball goes in the back of the net. Interviewer: Uhum.1st enthusiast: In... when you are actually witnessing the whole build-up and the movement. And when it goes in, what is actually happening when the ballgoes in the net is that this tension you have built up is suddenly…you give vent to it all and...Interviewer: It’s re leased?1st enthusiast: It’s released; you know it’s like the tremendous energy being... Interviewer: Uhum.1st enthusiast: Thrown out.Interviewer: Um?1st enthusiast: It’s a tremendous feeling.2nd enthusiast: I... i... i... it also...Interviewer: Uhum?2nd enthusiast: Gives the opportunity to... to... to get rid of a lot of... er...er aggressive...er... a lot of your aggressive feelings.Interviewer: Um.2nd enthusiast: You know. You can...1st enthusiast: Ummm.2nd enthusiast: Shout and scream.Interviewer: Umm.2nd enthusiast: Things which in... in... in normal company you wouldn’t do. Interviewer: But you personally have never been involved in a brawl?2nd enthusiast: No, no. But I’ve seen them.Interviewer: A fight?2nd enthusiast: I have seen them, yeah.Interviewer: Uhum?2nd enthusiast: I... I’ve seen.Interviewer: Uhum.2nd enthusiast: Of course,Interviewer: Uhum?2nd enthusiast: Un... un... wild behaviour is news,Interviewer: Uhum.2nd enthusiast: And good behavior isn’t news.1st enthusiast: Umm.2nd enthusiast: So that the press tends to seize on... on skinheads at football matches.Interviewer: Uhim.2nd enthusiast: And this is blown up.Interviewer: Uhumm.2nd enthusiast: This is blown up. And in fact, in my opinion… i... i...i… it probably contributes to the violence...Interviewer: Um.2nd enthusiast: On the terraces.Task 9【原文】A: Yes, people used to say that sporting competitions between nations was a good substitute for war but it seems in recent times at football matches that it’s er... that they’re taking war with them into the er... into the football ground.I mean, does… doesn’t international competit ion in this way simply ferment nationalist feelings and make the whole situation rather unsporting in the end? B: I think it does, yes. I mean... I... er in a good game of any sport really that...I personally think if it’s played as it should be played, w inning is not the be all and end all, it’s playing the game… which is the...A: But is that possible today in a professional sport?B: No, I’m afraid it isn’t.C: No, I don’t think it should be in professional sport. In a professional sport we’re talking about winning… um because winning is where the money is, hence professional and...B: That’s the way it is. Whether it should be is another question... I er...C: Oh no, that is how it should be. If you don’t want it to be like that then you have amateur sport.A: Well, what about the effect on the supporters though in that case. There... is there any truth in saying that the violence on the field of sport between professionals who are behaving professionally and we’ve got this very unpleasant impression “a professional foul” in football,doesn’t that lead to violence off… off the...?C: Yes, I’m sure it does, and really we’re talking about responsibility and I don’t think that in some of the games where violence is prevalent, as for example football, that we have responsible officials. I think, er, to stop violence on the terraces then, yes you must stop some of the violence on the field.A: Maybe professionalism is part of this. I mean the… perhaps the most violent game that we play in Britain on the field is the Rugby Union and yet it’s very rare for any… for there to be any er trouble in the grounds where...B: The point is that in Rugby Union one can’t tell the difference between a legitimate tackle and a bodily assault.C: No, but I think that it’s han dled more... more responsibly. For example, I believe in Rugby when one person is sent off, generally there’s... there’s someone from the opposing side also sent off, and I think it’s fair to say that in most trouble spots there…there is more than one person involved. By doing things like that you defuse the situation.B: I think the referees in Rugby are much tougher. I mean one word against the referee inRugby and you’re off in a lot of cases.A: But also, of course, it’s an amateur game. There isn’t the money in it is there, for the players.B: But even in Rugby League where there is money involved, although perhaps not such a large extent on the whole as in football, the referee usually has much more control of the situation.Task 10【答案】A.1) How do top athletes handle defeat and disappointment?Or where do they find the spark to keep going after a loss?2) Wining or losing depends solely on the athlete’s own skill and effort.B.1) Think positively.2) Stick with it.3) Work on small things.4) Learn from mistakes.5) Pick yourself up.C.1) Name: Siri LindleyProfession: long-distance running, swimming, cyclingResponse: make me stronger and more determined, pick my head up, start thinking positive, visualize myself succeeding2) Name: Allen JohnsonProfession: 100-meter hurdles at the 1996 OlympicsResponse: You can’t be the best every day, you can be the best on some days3) Name: Diver Mark RuizProfession: national championsResponse: the little things that count, practice that much harder, feel motivated to practice, if I don’t train well,I don’t do well.4) Name: Shannon MillerProfession: two goldsResponse: go back to the gym and figure out what went wrong, learn form your mistakes 5) Name: Michael WeissProfession: one of the best, a lot of spillsResponse: a part of growing, lift you up, pick yourself up【原文】Top athletes offer advice on making the most of a loss How do top athletes handle defeat and disappointment? In many cases, an athlete can turn to his or her teammates for support and encouragement. But in some sports, the performer competes as an individual. Winning or losing depends solely on the athlete’s own skill and effort.I asked several top performers in individual sports like gymnastics, skating, and track and field where they find the spark to keep going after a loss. Maybe theirresponses will be helpful to you, too.Siri Lindley is a top triathlete, competing in events that combine long-distance running, swimming, and cycling. “I try to use what I learn from each loss to make me stronger and more determined,” she says. “Then I pick my head up and start thinking positive and I visualize myself succeeding the next time. Let the losses make you stronger.”Allen Johnson won a gold medal in the 100-meter hurdles at the 1996 Olympics, but he knows that he can’t win every race. “When I don’t win, I have to accept the fact that I made a mistake or that someone was better on that day,” he says. “You can’t be the best every day, but you can be the best on some days.”Diver Mark R uiz has won many national championships. “In my sport it is the little things that count,” he says. “Each dive must be done perfectly. If I don’t do well in a meet, it pushes me to practice that much harder. If I don’t feel motivated to practice, I remind myself that if I don’t train well, I don’t do well. So I go right back to working on all the small things.”Gymnast Shannon Miller has won several Olympic medals, including two golds. “If I make a mistake in the middle of a competition, I try to forget about it because I have to go on,” she says. “If I do poorly over the course of an entire meet, I go back to the gym and figure out what went wrong. It’s so important to learn from your mistakes.”Figure skater Michael Weiss is one of the best in his sport, but there have been a lot of spills along the way. “I look at failing as a part of growing,” he says.“When you lose and you are feeling down, without teammates to lift you up, you have to be strong enough to pick yourself up.”Task 11【答案】Title: Preventing Sporting Injuries1. IntroductionImportance of sports: a great way to keep in shape for most people, and a great start on the road to a healthy lifestyle.Topic of the talk: tips for getting the most out of your fitness programme and preventing injury.2. Preventing injuries2.1 Avoiding dehydrationHow to avoid dehydration: drink consistently before and during your sporting activity.Remember: alcohol and any drinks containing caffeine can lead to increased dehydration.If you are outdoors.Remember: bring adequate sun protection.Avoid: activities between 10 am and 2 pm, the hottest part of the day.2.2 Warming up, cooling downStretching: helps to promote blood flow to your muscles,。

现代大学英语听力1原文加答案Unit 11

现代大学英语听力1原文加答案Unit 11

Unit 11Task 1【答案】A.1) Because the weather is fine and he needs some exercise.2) Because the razor blades are on sale. You buy one and you get one for free.3) $2.83 (two dollars and eighty-three cents).B.paperback books, buying a lipstick, by the newspaper stand, mind, surface appearance【原文】Tony: Carol. I’m going to the drugstore. Is there anything I can get for you?Carol: Why, yes. We need some toothpaste. I was planning to get a new lipstick, too.Tony: Well, I can get the toothpaste but not t he lipstick! You’d better come along with me. Carol: All right. Just let me get my coat. Are we walking or taking the car?Tony: Let’s walk. The weather is fine and, besides, I need the exercise. I’ve been spending t oo much time in my easy chair.Carol: In deed you have. Let’s go.(At the drugstore)Clerk: Yes, sir. May I help you?Tony: I’d like this tube of toothpaste and a package of razor blades.Clerk: We have a sale on razor blades this week. Two packages for the price of one.Tony: Good. That’s the kind I usually buy, too. I’ll take two packages.Clerk: Will there be anything else?Tony: No, I...oh, yes. I’d like some shaving cream, too.Clerk: All right. Let’s see. That comes to two dollars and eighty-three cents.Tony: Hmm. All I have is a ten-dollar bill.Clerk: I think I can give you change. Here you are. That’s three dollars, four, five, and five makes ten dollars. Thank you, sir.Tony: Thank you.Carol: Oh, there you are, Tony. They have a wonderful selection of paperback books here. There are four or five that I’d love to have.Tony: Four or five? Carol, I thought you were just buying a lipstick.Carol: I did buy one. But then I was waiting for you by the newspaper stand, and I started looking at the books, and...Tony: All right, dear. It seems that a trip to the drugstore can improve the mind as well as the surface appearance!Task 2【答案】Assistance: Can I help you, Miss?Anna: I’m looking for a skirt, and a top to go with it.Assistance: You’re in the wrong department, dear. You need “Separates”. Over there, on the right.You can see the signs from here.Anna: Separates. I see. And can I get a pair of tennis shorts there?Assistance: Tennis? No, I’m afraid not. You’ll find the shorts you’re looking for in “Leisurewear”.That’s on the first floor. The escalator is over there. On your right.Anna: Thank you. You’re very kind.Assistance: Not at all.Anna: Oh, one other thing. Where can I find some jewellery? Not expensive. For a disco. Assistance: Costume jewellery. That’s in “Accessories”— with belts, handbags, gloves, scarves, purses, and hats. That’s on the second floor. Same escalator.Anna: Thank you.Task 3【答案】1) d, 2) c, 3) d, 4) c【原文】Cathy: I’m fed up with sitting on packing cases, Joe. Don’t you think we could buy at least two chairs?Joe: Do you know how match new chairs cost? One cheap comfortable armchair (80)Cathy: Yes, I know. It’s terrible. But I have an idea. Why don’t we look for chairs at a street market? I’ve always wanted to see one.Joe: All right. Which one shall we go to?Cathy: Portobello Road, I think. There are a lot of second-hand things there. But we’ll have to go tomorrow. It’s only open on Saturdays.Joe: What time do you want to go? Not too early I hope.Cathy: The guidebook says the market is open from 9 to 6. It’s a very popular market so we’d better be there when it opens.Joe: Right. I’ll set the alarm.Cathy: Oh, Joe. Look at the crowd.Joe: They must have the same guidebook that we have.Cathy: But it’s very exciting. Look at that old tablecloth and those beautiful curtains.Jo e: Aren’t we looking for chairs?Cathy: Yes, but we need curtains. Come on.Cathy: Whew. I’m so tired that I can’t even remember what we’ve bought.Joe: I can. A lot of rubbish. I’ll make some tea. You can have a look at our “bargains”.Cathy: Joe, the cu rtains are beautiful but they’re very dirty.Joe: What did you say?Cathy: I said the curtains were very dirty.Joe: Why don’t you wash them?Cathy: I can’t. They’re too big. I’ll have them dry-cleaned.Joe: And what are you going to do about those holes. Can you mend them?Cathy: I can’t. I can’t sew. I’ll have them mended.Joe: How much will all that cost? I never want to see another bargain, and we still haven’t got any chairs.Task 4【答案】1) He was allowed to keep only enough money to buy his lunch in the office.2) He won ten thousand pounds on the lottery.3) She was delighted at first.4) Then she became angry and demanded to know how her husband could afford the lottery ticket. 【原文】There was once a large, fat woman who had a small, thin husband. He had a job in a big company and was given his weekly wages every Friday evening. As soon as he got home on Fridays, his wife used to make him give her all his money, and then she used to give him back only enough to buy his lunch in the office every day.One day the small man came home very excited. He hurried into the living-room. His wife was listening to the radio and eating chocolates there.“You’ll never guess what happened to me today, dear,” he said.He waited for a few seconds and then a dded, “I won ten thousand pounds on the lottery!”“That’s wonderful!”said his wife delightedly. But then she thought for a few seconds and added angrily, “But wait a moment! How could you afford to buy the ticket?”Task 5【答案】1) Because the vegetable s were fresher and the store had various things she couldn’t get elsewhere.2) Very well.3) The two teenage boys were both wearing long, old-fashioned overcoats and they looked rather ridiculous in them because the coats were too big.4) She saw one of the boys pick up a tin of food and drop it into the inside pocket of his overcoat and later another boy did the same.5) Because he was checking through his list at the cash till.6) They had both buttoned their coats and fastened them with their belts, but Mr. Patel didn’t seem suspicious at all.【原文】Jennifer got off the bus from the university and began walking towards the flat she shared with two other students. On her way she had to buy some food and stopped in one of the shops in the street. It was run by an Asian family, and although the prices there were a little higher than in the big supermarket further down the street, she did a lot of her shopping there. The vegetables were fresher and they had various thi ngs she couldn’t get elsewhere. Mr. Patel, the owner of the shop, was checking through a list, but smiled, as he always did, when he saw her come in.“How’s Mrs. Patel today?” she asked?“Oh, better. But only a little better, I’m afraid,” Mr. Patel sighed.“Well, I hope she gets out of hospital soon.”She picked up a wire basket and walked towards the back of the shop, where the rice was kept. The shop was divided by three long aisles, with rows of shelves crammed with all sorts of things. Except for her and Mr. Patel, there were only two other people there. They were two teenage boys,and they were standing at the end of one of the aisles. She glanced at them as she passed. They were both wearing long, old-fashioned overcoats and they looked rather ridiculous in them because the coats were too big. But such things were popular with some teenagers at the time. “Watch out, stupid,” she heard one of them whisper to the other. She walked on to the next aisle and found the rice she was looking for. Then she heard something else. It sounded like a tin dropping on the floor. She peered through a gap in the shelf and caught a glimpse of one of the boys bending down. She saw him pick up a tin of food. But instead of putting it in the shopping basket, he dropped it into the inside pocket of his long overcoat. Jennifer glanced back down the aisle. She could see Mr. Patel at the cash till, still checking through his list. Then she looked through the gap in the shelf again. The boys still had their backs to her. “Come on, let’s get out of here,” she heard one of them say. At the same time, she saw one of them put another tin in his overcoat pocket. They moved away from her. She could no longer see what they were doing or hear what they were saying.When she got to the till, the two boys were in front of her. She watched them pay for the few things they had in the basket. They had both buttoned their coats and fastened them with their belts. Mr. Patel did not seem suspicious at all. He even smiled at them as they were about to leave. Jennifer opened her mouth to say something.Task 6【原文】NUMBER 1: The jacketShopper: Excuse me. I like this jacket, but…ur, do you have any different designs?Clerk: No, sir, actually, striped is the only style we have.Shopper: Really?Clerk: Yes, stripes are very popular this year.Shopper: Oh. Well, thank you. Maybe I’ll look around a bit more.Clerk: That’s fine, sir.NUMBER 2: The CD playerClerk: May I help you?Shopper: Yeah, how much is the CD player?Clerk: Let’s see… Oh, it’s on sale right now. It’s only eighty-five ninety-nine.Shopper: Wow, that’s cheap.Clerk: Yes, it’s very good buy.Shopper: Hmm.NUMBER 3: The cordless phone1st Shopper: Gee, look at this. A cordless phone for less than fifty dollars.2nd Shopper: That’s really cheap. We’ve talked about getting a cordless phone. It sure would be convenient. What brand is it?1st Shopper: Brand? Uh, let’s see. It’s Electo.2nd Shopper: Electo? Have you ever heard of it?1st Shopper: Hmm. No, I haven’t.2nd Shopper: I don’t know. With electronic stuff, if you don’t know the company that made it.1st Shopper: Yeah, I know what you mean.NUMBER 4: The jeans1st Shopper: (footsteps) So, what do you think?2nd Shopper: They look great on you, Sue.1st Shopper: Yeah, the fit’s good. But I always worry with jeans. The cotton might shrink.2nd Shopper: Hmm, yeah, wash them a few times and they might be too small.1st Shopper: Maybe they have a bigger size. (to the Clerk) Excuse me.Clerk: Yes?1st Shopper: Do you have these in the next larger size?Clerk: Let me check, ma’am. Ah, I’m sorry. We don’t seem to have that size at the moment.NUMBER 5: The computer1st Shopper: There are so many different kinds of computers —I don’t know which to buy.2nd Shopper: Well, what are you going to use it for?1st Shopper: Well, I’m just writing with it mainly. You know, I’m working on a novel.2nd Shopper: How’s it going?1st Shopper: Pretty good, actually.2nd Shopper: Well, are you going to write at home, or when you travel, or... when?1st Shopper: Well, I do travel a lot. Maybe I’ll think about a laptop.2nd Shopper: I’m really happy with mine. It’s wonderful.1st Shopper: Yeah? Really convenient?2nd Shopper: It’s easy to use. And so lightweight. I love mine.1st Shopper: Hmm. (sound of someone keyboarding) This laptop is certainly easy to use. Maybe I’ll...NUMBER 6: The notebookShopper: Excuse me.Clerk: Yes?Shopper: Are these all the notebooks you have?Clerk: Yes. Is there something special you’re looking for?Shopper: These all seem to have fifty pages. Uh, do you have any with more pages? Like a hundred or maybe a hundred and fifty?Clerk: I’m sorry. All the notebooks we have are right there.Shopper: I see. I guess I’ll keep looking. Th anks.Task 7【答案】A.People Positions ResponsibilitiesHugo Abbs Senior Consultant Discuss plans and suggest alternatives Anne Springer Applications Programmer Design softwareBill Andrews Senior Engineer Supply and install equipmentB.l) Only for word-processing.2) To do accounting.3) It’s flexible. It can be adapted to the needs of the company with some small modifications.【原文】Johnson: What services do you offer, Mr. Abbs?Abbs: We offer a complete range of services for the micro-user; it depends very much on your needs. Are you buying a system for the first time?Johnson: No, we already have a system. But we only use it for word-processing. We want to expand it to do accounting.Abbs: Well, if you’re expanding your system, perhaps you need more advice. That’s my job. I can discuss your plans with you and suggest alternatives.Johnson: What do I do if I need new equipment?Abbs: You should talk to Bill Andrews, our Senior Engineer. He will look at your present system. Then he can supply and install any new equipment that you need.Johnson: Suppose I need my own software?Abbs: Then you can see Anne Springer, our applications programmer. We have designed our own flexible software called Master. It can be adapted to your needs with some smallmodifications, but you may have to adapt a little bit yourself.Johnson: Well, that’s quite possible. Now, what about training? My staff haven’t used accounting systems before...Task 8【答案】A.1) T, 2) T, 3) F, 4) F, 5) F【原文】Telephonist: Hello, Compucare Computer Consultants.Millie Firth: Hello, I wonder if you could give me some information about the Nova computer.Telephonist: Ah yes, of course. You need to speak to one of our sales consultants. Could you hold the line a moment please? ...Hello... I’m putting you through to Mr. Losada,our sales consultant.Millie Firth: Hello, my name’s Millie Firth. I wonder if you could give me some informatio n about the Nova computer.Alfredo Losada: Of course. Are you interested in the Basic model or the Basic Plus?Millie Firth: I’m not sure. Which one is more suitable for small businesses?Alfredo Losada: Well, it depends on what you really need. We advise big and small businesses and sometimes a big firm has the Basic or a small firm has the Basic Plus.Millie Firth: Well, we do need a wide range of software. Or we will in the future.Alfredo Losada: Well, I think you should consider the Basic Plus.Millie Firth: Do you supply the software?Alfredo Losada: No, we don’t supply any software but we can recommend suppliers.Millie Firth: What about training?Alfredo Losada: Well, there’s a training programme with both models. But we also run special courses for new users.Millie Firth: That sounds impressive. Could we come in to discuss things with you in more detail?Alfredo Losada: Yes, by all means. When would you like to come in? We are open between 9:00 and 5:30, Mondays to Fridays.Millie Firth: What about 2 pm this afternoon?Alfredo Losada: That’ll be fine. I’ll give you a free demonstration and you’ll be able to decide what suits you best. Would you like to give me your name?Millie Firth: Yes, it’s Millie…Task 9【答案】Car tested: GTPrice: £11,869Problems:1. handle2. a) slide back, b) engine noise, c) open3. leg room4. wing mirrors5. small scratches6. badly finished paintwork7. the silver plastic stripConclusion: quite a lot of irritating faults in an expensive car【原文】…and the car we tested was the GT. It’s the most expensive model in the range and at 11,869 pounds. It is, I think, a little overpriced— you can buy the equivalent Volkswagen for almost 800 pounds less. But it’s a beautiful car and I’d been looking forward to driving it for a long time. Unfortunately, I had problems right from the start. The day I tested the car was one of the few sunny days we had this summer. So, naturally enough, I decided to open the sun-roof. But the handle was so stiff that it was almost impossible to move it. I did, eventually, get the sun-roof open but as it finally began to slide back it made the most awful noise. Noise, I’m afraid, is quite a feature of this car. The car’s interior seemed to be very badly insulated against engine noise, and with the sun-roof finally open the noise of the wind was very loud indeed.In general, the car was quite comfortable, but I didn’t really have enough leg room, and I found it difficult to adjust the wing mirrors to the position I wanted.The test car was, of course, brand new, but I did find quite a lot of small scratches and badly finished paintwork around the headlights and radiator grille. And the silver plastic strip which runs along each side of the car wasn’t properly fixed to the car body on the left hand side of the car I tested. So, quite a lot of irritating faults in a car you’re going to have to pay....Task 10【答案】1) It’s described as “buy now, pay later”.2) Selling their products and services.3) For centuries.4) One type is issued directly by a store to a customer; the other kind is issued by a credit company.5) The store credit card can be used to make purchases only at a particular store, whereas credit cards from credit companies can be used to buy things almost anywhere.6) Because most credit companies are connected to large banks.7) Once a month.8)a) The customer can buy what he wants when he wants it. There is no need to save up money in advance.b) Having a credit card protects the owner. The owner doesn’t have to worry about losing the card.c) Credit cards can be used when something unexpected happens. This is important when you don’t have any cash with you.9) Customers tend to overspend.【原文】Many businesses, such as department stores, restaurants, hotels and airline companies, use a credit system for selling their products and services. In a credit system the seller agrees to sell something to the buyer without immediately receiving cash. The buyer receives the goods or services immediately and promises to pay for them later.This “buy-now-pay-later” credit system is quite old. People have been buying things on credit for centuries. But nowadays people use credit cards.There are two types of credit cards. One type is issued directly by a store to a customer. Many large department stores issue credit cards to their customers. The store credit card can be used to make purchases only at a particular store. For example, a credit card from Swan’s Department Store can be used only at Swan’s Department Store.The other kind of credit cards is issued by a credit company. VISA and American Express are examples of credit companies. Credit cards from credit companies can be used to buy things almost anywhere. If you have a major credit card, you can buy air plane tickets, stay at hotels and eat at restaurants with it.Most large credit companies are connected to large banks. So if you want a credit card from a credit company, you generally have to make an application at a bank.After an applicant receives a credit card, he or she can make purchases using the card. The credit company sends the customer a statement of purchases at the end of each month. Generally the customer has to pay 25 to 50 percent of their credit bill every month. The customer pays directly to the credit company. And the credit company pays directly to the store, or hotel, or restaurant.There are some advantages and some disadvantages to using credit cards. The biggest advantage for the consumer is expressed by the phrase “buy now, pay later”. This means that the consumer can purchase what she wants when she wants it. There is no need to save up money in advance.Another advantage of having a credit card is that it protects the owner, if a credit card is lost or stolen, the owner only has to call the credit company and the credit company will stop the credit card number. No one else can use it. So the owner doesn’t have to worry about losing the card.Another advantage of the credit card system is that the consumer receives a record of her purchases. Every month the credit customer receives a bill. The bill has a list of all purchases from that month. This makes it easier to remember when and where purchases are made.And another advantage is that credit cards can be used when something unexpected happens. Many kinds of professional people— plumbers, taxi drivers, doctors and dentists — will accept credit cards in an emergency. This is very important if you don’t have any cash with you.Using credit cards has one major advantage. The main disadvantage is that consumers tend to overspend: they spend more than they make. If a consumer buys a lot of things on credit, she has to make large payments each month. Sometimes, it becomes impossible to keep up with the payments. The consume r’s life becomes more and more difficult. If the consumer can’t make her payments, her credit cards will be taken away. It will be very difficult for her to get another credit card in the future.So we can see that a credit buying system has some advantages and some disadvantages. On the one hand, it gives people some buying freedom; on the other hand, it tends to encourage over-spending.Task 11【答案】unproductive, stopped, mass markets, cheap, sell goods, inform, household goods, read, hardly possible, witty, revenue, small ads, community【原文】Advertisers Perform a Useful Service to the Community Advertisers tend to think big and perhaps this is why they’re always coming in for criticism. Their critics seem to resent them because they have a flair for self-promotion and because they have so much money to throw around. “It’s iniquitous,” they say, “that this entirely unproductive industry (if we can call it that) should absorb millions of pounds each year. It only goes to show how much profit the big comp anies are making. Why don’t they stop advertising and reduce the price of their goods? After all, it’s the consumer who pays.”The poor old consumer! He’d have to pay a great deal more if advertising didn’t create mass markets for products. It is precisely because of the heavy advertising that consumer goods are so cheap. But we get the wrong idea if we think the only purpose of advertising is to sell goods. Another equally important function is to inform. A great deal of the knowledge we have about household goods derives largely from the advertisements we read. Advertisements introduce us to new products or remind us of the existence of ones we already know about. Supposing you wanted to buy a washing machine, it is more than likely you would obtain details regarding performance, price, etc., from an advertisement.Lots of people pretend that they never read advertisements, but this claim may be seriouslydoubted. It is hardly possible not to read advertisements these days. And what fun they often are, too! Just think what a railway station or a newspaper would be like without advertisements. Would you enjoy gazing at a blank wall or reading railway bylaws while waiting for a train? Would you like to read only closely-printed columns of news in your daily paper? A cheerful, witty advertisement makes such a difference to a drab wall or a newspaper full of the daily ration of calamities.We must not forget, either, that advertising makes a positive contribution to our pockets. Newspapers, commercial radio and television companies could not subsist without this source of revenue. The fact that we pay so little for our daily paper, or can enjoy so many broadcast programmes is due entirely to the money spent by advertisers. Just think what a newspaper would cost if we had to pay its full price!Another thing we mustn’t forget is the “small ads”, which are in virtually every newspaper and magazine. What a tremendously useful service they perform for the community! Just about anything can be accomplished through these columns. For instance, you can find a job, buy or sell a house, announce a birth, marriage or death in what used to be called the “hatch, match and dispatch” column s; but by far the most fascinating section is the personal or agony column. No other item in a newspaper provides such entertaining reading or offers such a deep insight into human nature. It’s the best advertisement for advertising there is!Task 12【答案】What Is Money?In the old days, most people did not need money. They could usually grow enough food. They could build a house, and they could even make their own clothes. They needed a few other things, but they could get them from other people. If they wanted a knife, for example, they could exchange some food, or other useful things, for one. People have used many things as “money” in different parts of the world. A lot of them are made of metal, because metal is useful. Gold is a beautiful metal, and it has become very valuable. A little gold can buy a lot of things, so people all over the world have often made coins out of gold. Very few coins are made of gold these days, however. Most money is just pieces of paper, but these pieces of paper are valuable because people will exchange all kinds of things for them.。

现代大学英语听力1原文加答案Unit

现代大学英语听力1原文加答案Unit

Unit 14Task 1A reporter is interviewing some people about unusual sports.Interviewer: Hello, Andrea. I’ve just been watching you skiing. You’re really very good, aren’t you? Very fast indeed.Andrea: Thank you. I do teach skiing, you know, so I have to be good. But now I also have to be very fast, because I’ve been selected for the Olympic team and I’m traini ng forthe Olympic Games next year.Interviewer: Photos, water sports are your work — water skiing, parasailing. Do you still enjoy them?Photos: Oh yes, I love water skiing particularly, but some days, when it’s raining, there’s nothing to do. So I’m learning to play chess in my spare time. It’s a nice game, youknow.Interviewer: And Yannis, how old are you?Yannis: I’m fifteen. I’m on holiday at the moment and I’m helping my brother. I’m learning to drive the boat. But I live in Athens with my family. I’m a student there. Interviewer: Claude, you look very fit. How old are you?Claude: I’m fifty now. I own this windsurfing club, but I’m also the club manager. I windsurfa lot and I meet a lot of British and Canadians, so I’m studying English twice a week— in the evenings.Interviewer: Stewart, you are from Scotland, aren’t you?Stewart: Yes, I’m a bank m anager in Aberdeen. But as you know, I go underwater caving. I want to go to Borneo next summer. But it’s a very dangerous sport so I’m practicingdiving every weekend, at the moment.Task 2【答案】1) b, 2) Lift the club backwards away from the ball; keeping left arm straight till you get to the top of the wing; keep your head down; keep looking at the ball; swing down; hit the ball; throw that club towards the hole.3) c, 4) Bend your knees; thrust your hands back; go into the water; make your heads follow, go straight in and your legs follow; put your hands back, behind your back.5) c, 6) Take your left hand; get some hair on its neck; get a good firm hold; lift your left leg; put it in the stirrup; hang on tight with your left hand onto the hair; your toes are facing towards its back; put your other hand on the back of the saddle; swing your leg over the back.【原文】Extract 1:Steve: Lift the club backwards away from the ball. That’s it. Keeping that left arm straight. Fern: It’s not easy.Steve: ...till you get to the top of the wing. [Yeah.]Good. Now the very important thing — you must keep your head down all the time.Fern: Down?Steve: Yes, keep looking at the ball.Fern: Oh, but I’m looking at the club.Steve: No. You must look at the ball. That’s it. Right, now...Fern: It’s not a very natural position, is it?Steve: Well, now swing down. [Yes.] that’s it... swing down and through keeping that left arm straight [Yes.] and even when you... even after you’ve hit the ball, you must keep that head looking at where the ball was. Yes.Fern: It doesn’t seem right to me!Steve: No, no. You’re doing really well. That’s OK.Fern: It’s not easy, is it?Steve: And after you’ve hit the ball, keep looking at where the ball was but make sure you throw that club towards the hole.Fern: That’s not going to be difficult at all. I’ve almost let go several times.Steve: You mustn’t let go. I mean you must just point the club towards the hole.Fern: Yes, that’s why I’m looking in that direction so I can check where it’s gone... hasn’t gone very fast actually.Steve: Good. You’ll be really good.Extract 2:Tom: Am I standing in the right position?Ruth: Well, you’ve got to bend your knees a bit more, and thrust your hands back, so when you go into the water, you make your heads follow, er... go straight in and your legs follow.Tom: Is this OK?Ruth: Yes, that’s just...yes, that’s just about right and bend your knees a little bit more.Tom: Does...? This all right now?Ruth: Yes, that’s fine. Now, put your hands back, behind your back. OK? Nice and straight...Yes, that’s it, and then, make it... now, go on, go! Make your head go straight in and your, erm...legs follow.Extract 3:Jackie: Lesley, I don’t think it likes me?Lesley: Oh, never mind Jackie, now relax. Now take a deep breath all right, because it can sense if you’re nervous. [OK.] All right? Now, you feeling OK? [Yes, jolly good.] Now, take your left hand, [Mm-mm] and get some hair on its neck.., get a good firm hold. [OK.] Now, can you lift your left leg and put it in the stirrup... you put your foot in the stirrup. [My left leg.] OK? Yes. Hang on tight with your left hand on...[Uhhum.] onto the hair. OK? [Right.] And put your left foot in the stirrup.Jackie: Fine. So my toes are pointing forwards?Lesley: No, your toes are facing towards its back... end. All right? [OK.] OK? Right, now, can you hop round [Mm-mm.] so that you’re facing its middle [Mm-mm.] alright? And put your other hand on the back of the saddle. [Fine.] OK? Feeling comfortable? [Yes.] OK. Now,you’ve got to take a big jump, and you’ve got to swing your leg over the back, but don’t kick it, because it’ll be frightened. [Uh-huh-huh-huh.] OK?Jackie: It’ll be frightened? OK, here we go.Task 3【答案】1) a, 2) c, 3) a, 4) b, 5) b【原文】Man: Honey, the basketball game is about to start. And could you bring some chips and a bowl of ice cream? And... uh... a slice of pizza from the fridge.Woman: Anything else?Man: Nope, that’s all for now. Hey, honey, you know, they’re organizing a company basket ball team, and I’m thinking about joining. What do you think?Woman: Humph.Man: “Humph!” what do you mean “Humph?” I was the star player in high school.Woman: Yeah, twenty-five years ago. Look, I just don’t want you having a heart attack running up and down the court.Man: So, what are you suggesting? Should I just abandon the idea? I’m not that out of shape. Woman: Well... you ought to at least have a physical before you begin. I mean, it has been at least five years since you played at all.Man: Well, OK, but...Woman: And you need to watch your diet and cut back on the fatty foods, like ice cream. And you should try eating more fresh fruits and vegetables.Man: Yeah, you’re probably right.Woman: And you should take up a little weight training to strengthen your muscles or perhaps try cycling to build up your cardiovascular system. Oh, and you need to go to bed early instead of watching TV half the night.Man: Hey, you’re starting to sound like my personal fitness instructor.Woman: No, I just love you, and I want you to be around for a long, long time.Task 4【答案】1) T, 2) T, 3) F, 4) F, 5) F, 6) T, 7) F, 8) F【原文】Mal c: Bye, Mum, we’re off.Mum: Off where?Boy: Break dancing.Mum: Break dancing? Whatever’s that?Mal c: It’s great.Boy: Yeah, it’s great.Mum: I daresay it is. But what is it?Malc: It’s break dancing. You dance on your shoulders and on your back and on your head when you are good enough.Mum: It doesn’t sound much like dancing to me.Boy: It is. It’s great!Malc: Yeah.Mum: More like some competition in the Olympic Games.Malc: Yeah. It’s good exercise. Keeps you fit. But not like school athletics. It’s great.Mum: And where are you off to do your break dancing?Malc: Oh, we do it in the street. Anywhere! You don’t have to go to a dance hall to do it. You just do it — where you feel like it.Boy: It’s great.Mum: But you can’t just start dancing in the street like that.Boy: Why not? We take the portable cassette recorder and when we find a nice street, we turn the music up really loud and start dancing.Mum: And don’t the neighbours and police complain?Malc: No. They’re too interested watching us dance.Mum: On your back, shoulders and heads? I see. It sounds fascinating, I must say. I’m not surprised they watch. Very amusing.Boy: Yeah, it’s great. We have competitions to see who can do it the fastest without falling over.Malc’s the winner so far.Malc: Yeah, I’m the best. I teach the others but they can’t do it like me yet.Mum: I suppose that explains the conditions of your clothes lately.Boy: What do you mean, Mum?Mum: All these tears and holes I’ve suddenly been noticing in unusual places. That explains it. If you’re dancing on your shoulders and backs, you’ll be wearing your hair out next, I suppose.Malc: On, c ome on, Mum. It’s great.Mum: Oh well, off you go. But in future wear all your old pullovers and shirts, will you? It’s not very great sitting up late at night sewing up holes in your new ones. Go on, off with you.Task 5【答案】1) c, 2) a, 3) c, 4) b, 5) b【原文】Hello everybody, and welcome back to a thrilling game at the Tokyo Dome with the US Team taking a drumming at the hands of the Japanese national team going into the second half, 51 to 26. The US Dream Team is made up of NBA veterans — supposedly the best we have to offer — but they need a miracle to dig themselves out of a hole and come back at this point.Unfortunately for the Dream Team, their leading scorer, High-Fly Wilson, was ejected one minute into the second quarter after climbing into the stands and fighting with a spectator who had continually heckled Wilson for shooting three airballs in a row.Another unuaual moment came late in the second quarter when the Japanese center, Tomohiro Suzuki, suffered a concussion and was knocked out cold as he lunged for a ball and collided with the knee of one of his own teammates. There also have been several other injuries, including the loss of starting forward, Masa Harada.Some of the coaches on the US team are attributing the team’s slow performance to some raw fish they had last night while attending a banquet in their honor. Next thing we’ll know, they’ll be blaming their players’ cement hands on a demonstration class on Japanese paper folding earlier in the week. Who knows what’ll be next?OK, it looks like we’re ready for the second half.Task 6【答案】A.80 hectares, 470,000 square meters, 17,600, 760-hectare, 14, 15, less than a 30-minute driveB.1) It is located in the western part of the Village and consists of apartment buildings, dining halls, and other facilities.2) It is located in the eastern part of the Village and will provide leisure facilities and cultural activities for athletes.3) After the Games, it will become a residential area.【原文】Olympic VillageWith a land area of 80 hectares and a total building floor area of 470,000 square meters, the Olympic Village, located within the Olympic Green, will accommodate 17,600 athletes and team officials. A 760-hectare “Forest Park” will also be created within the Olympic Village.14 venues will be used to hold 15 sporting events within the Olympic Green. These venues are in walking distance from the Olympic Village. All other Olympic venues in Beijing will be less than a 30-minute drive from the Village.The Olympic Village will provide safe and comfortable facilities to help athletes achieve their peak performance during the Games. The Residential Quarter located in the western part of the Village consists of apartment buildings, dining halls, and other facilities. The International Quarter located in the eastern part of the Village will provide leisure facilities and cultural activities for athletes.After the Games, the Village will become a residential area.Task 7【答案】1) The sheer physical nature of football.2) The physical movement of the man: a man who can jump to a height and then get the power behind a ball with his head.3) Well-timed tackle and a ball hit well on the run.4) When you’ve played the game yourself, you can real ly appreciate the skills involved.【原文】Two football enthusiasts talk about what they appreciate about the game.Interviewer: When you… when you go to a match, what do you actually look for? Is it the movement, is it the tactics? What I... or is it just the sheer...1st enthusiast: I think...Interviewer: Sheer exercise? The activity?1st enthusiast: For me it’s the… it’s the sheer physical…erm… the whole, the physical nature of the thing, you know.Interviewer: Uhm.1st enthusiast: For me, I... I like nothing better than to admire a good First Division side running out onto the pitch and you look at these men and their physical condition, everymuscle in their body is completely toned up, you know. And these men are runningand I mean running for ninety minutes.Interviewer: Um.1st enthusiast: And they are really… the... 1 think there is a beauty in it.Interviewer: Uhm?1st enthusiast: The... the physical movement of the man… a man who can jump to a height and then get the power behind a ball with his head.Interviewer: Uhum?1st enthusiast: Which I can just about get out of kicking a ball with my foot.Interviewer: Uhum?1st enthusiast: You know, that is the enjoyment for me.2nd enthusiast: Or a well-timed tackle.1st enthusiast: Yes.2nd enthusiast: Or a... a ball hit well on the run.Interviewer: Uhum.2nd enthusiast: These are skills which have to be learned over a number of years.Interviewer: Yes, uhum.2nd enthusiast: And then of course, you have players who are gifted.Interviewer: Uhum.2nd enthusiast: The skills come almost natural to them. And it’s a b... it’s a beautiful thing to... to see a really professional footballer in action.Interviewer: Uhum.2nd enthusiast: Just striking the ball. But...but it’s only when you’ve pl ayed the game yourself I think, that you can really appreciate.Interviewer: Um.2nd enthusiast: The skills involved.Interviewer: Um.Task 8【答案】1) It is as tiring as it is playing the game itself.2) The tension is released and the tremendous energy is thrown out.3) When a goal is scored, it gives the opportunity to get rid of a lot of your aggressive feelings.4) Because wild behaviour is news and good behavior isn’t.5) It probably contributes to the violence on the terraces.【原文】What’s it like being at a football match? The two enthusiasts talked about this and violence in football crowds.Interviewer: So, ...a...a...a typical match... i... i... is a very tense tense...2nd enthusiast: Oh, yes.Interviewer: Affair, isn’t it?2nd enthusiast: Oh, yes.1st enthusiast: I... in fact, it’s a very…sorry... it’s... a... it’s... a... er...almost tiring being a supporter. Interviewer: Uhm?1st enthusiast: As it is... erm... playing the game itself.1st enthusiast: Er... live fo otball for me is... is... is one of the most…er... stimulating experiences for...emotional sort of build-up and strain.Interviewer: Um.1st enthusiast: You know. The feeling when the ball goes in the back of the net.Interviewer: Uhum.1st enthusiast: In... when you are actually witnessing the whole build-up and the movement. And when it goes in, what is actually happening when the ball goes in the net is that thistension you have built up is suddenly… you give vent to it all and... Interviewer: It’s rel eased?1st enthusiast: It’s released; you know it’s like the tremendous energy being...Interviewer: Uhum.1st enthusiast: Thrown out.Interviewer: Um?1st enthusiast: It’s a tremendous feeling.2nd enthusiast: I... i... i... it also...Interviewer: Uhum?2nd enthusiast: Gives the opportunity to... to... to get rid of a lot of... er...er aggressive...er... a lot of your aggressive feelings.Interviewer: Um.2nd enthusiast: You know. You can...1st enthusiast: Ummm.2nd enthusiast: Shout and scream.Interviewer: Umm.2nd enthusiast: Things which in... in... in normal company you wouldn’t do.Interviewer: But you personally have never been involved in a brawl?2nd enthusiast: No, no. But I’ve seen them.Interviewer: A fight?2nd enthusiast: I have seen them, yeah.Interviewer: Uhum?2nd enthusiast: I... I’ve seen.Interviewer: Uhum.2nd enthusiast: Of course,Interviewer: Uhum?2nd enthusiast: Un... un... wild behaviour is news,Interviewer: Uhum.2nd enthusiast: And good behavior isn’t news.1st enthusiast: Umm.2nd enthusiast: So that the press tends to seize on... on skinheads at football matches. Interviewer: Uhim.2nd enthusiast: And this is blown up.Interviewer: Uhumm.2nd enthusiast: This is blown up. And in fact, in my opinion… i... i...i… it probably c ontributes to the violence...2nd enthusiast: On the terraces.Task 9【答案】【原文】A: Yes, people used to say that sporting competitions between nations was a good substitute for war but it seems in recent times at football matches that it’s er... that they’re taking war with them into the er... into the football ground. I mean, does… doesn’t international competitio n in this way simply ferment nationalist feelings and make the whole situation rather unsporting in the end?B: I think it does, yes. I mean... I... er in a good game of any sport really that... I personally think if it’s played as it should be played, winning is not the be all and end all, it’s playing the game… which is the...A: But is that possible today in a professional sport?B: No, I’m afraid it isn’t.C: No, I don’t think it should be in professional sport. In a professional sport we’re talking ab out winning… um because winning is where the money is, hence professional and...B: That’s the way it is. Whether it should be is another question... I er...C: Oh no, that is how it should be. If you don’t want it to be like that then you have amateur spo rt. A: Well, what about the effect on the supporters though in that case. There... is there any truth in saying that the violence on the field of sport between professionals who are behaving professionally and we’ve got this very unpleasant impression “a professional foul” in football, doesn’t that lead to violence off… off the...?C: Yes, I’m sure it does, and really we’re talking about responsibility and I don’t think that insome of the games where violence is prevalent, as for example football, that we have responsible officials. I think, er, to stop violence on the terraces then, yes you must stop some of the violence on the field.A: Maybe professionalism is part of this. I mean the… perhaps the most violent game that we play in Britain on the field i s the Rugby Union and yet it’s very rare for any… for there to be any er trouble in the grounds where...B: The point is that in Rugby Union one can’t tell the difference between a legitimate tackle and a bodily assault.C: No, but I think that it’s handl ed more... more responsibly. For example, I believe in Rugby when one person is sent off, generally there’s... there’s someone from the opposing side also sent off, and I think it’s fair to say that in most trouble spots there…there is more than one person involved. By doing things like that you defuse the situation.B: I think the referees in Rugby are much tougher. I mean one word against the referee in Rugby and you’re off in a lot of cases.A: But also, of course, it’s an amateur game. There isn’t t he money in it is there, for the players. B: But even in Rugby League where there is money involved, although perhaps not such a large extent on the whole as in football, the referee usually has much more control of the situation.Task 10【答案】A.1) How do top athletes handle defeat and disappointment?Or where do they find the spark to keep going after a loss?2) Wining or losing depends solely on the athlete’s own skill and effort.B.1) Think positively.2) Stick with it.3) Work on small things.4) Learn from mistakes.5) Pick yourself up.C.1) Name: Siri LindleyProfession: long-distance running, swimming, cyclingResponse: make me stronger and more determined, pick my head up, start thinking positive, visualize myself succeeding2) Name: Allen JohnsonProfession: 100-meter hurdles at the 1996 OlympicsResponse: You can’t be the best every day, you can be the best on some days3) Name: Diver Mark RuizProfession: national championsResponse: the little things that count, practice that much harder, feel motivated to practice, if I don’t train well,I don’t do well.4) Name: Shannon MillerProfession: two goldsResponse: go back to the gym and figure out what went wrong, learn form your mistakes5) Name: Michael WeissProfession: one of the best, a lot of spillsResponse: a part of growing, lift you up, pick yourself up【原文】Top athletes offer advice on making the most of a lossHow do top athletes handle defeat and disappointment? In many cases, an athlete can turn to his or her teammates for support and encouragement. But in some sports, the performer competes as an individual. Winning or losing depends solely on the athlete’s own skill and effort.I asked several top performers in individual sports like gymnastics, skating, and track and field where they find the spark to keep going after a loss. Maybe their responses will be helpful to you, too.Siri Lindley is a top triathlete, competing in events that combine long-distance running, swimming, and cycling. “I try to use what I learn from each loss to make me stronger and more determined,” she says. “Then I pick my head up and start thinking positive and I visualize myself succeeding the next time. Let the losses make you stronger.”Allen Johnson won a gold medal in the 100-meter hurdles at the 1996 Olympics, but he knows that he can’t win every race. “When I don’t win, I have to accept the fact that I made a mistake or that someone was better on that day,” he says. “You can’t be the best every day, but you can be the best on some days.”Diver Mark Ruiz has won many national championships. “In my sport it is the little things that count,” he says. “Each dive must be done perfectly. If I don’t do well in a meet, it pushes me to practice that much harder. If I don’t feel motivated to practice, I remind myself that if I don’t train well, I don’t do well. So I go right back to working on all the small things.”Gymnast Shannon Miller has won several Olympic medals, including two golds. “If I make a mistake in the middle of a competition, I try to forget about it because I have to go on,” she says. “If I do poorly over the course of an entire meet, I go back to the gym and figure out what went wrong. It’s so important to learn from your mistakes.”Figure skater Michael Weiss is one of the best in his sport, but there have been a lot of spills along the way. “I look at failing as a part of growing,” he says.“When you lose and you are feeling down, without teammates to lift you up, you have to be strong enough to pick yourself up.”Task 11【答案】Title: Preventing Sporting Injuries1. IntroductionImportance of sports: a great way to keep in shape for most people, and a great start on the road to a healthy lifestyle.Topic of the talk: tips for getting the most out of your fitness programme and preventing injury.2. Preventing injuries2.1 Avoiding dehydrationHow to avoid dehydration: drink consistently before and during your sporting activity. Remember: alcohol and any drinks containing caffeine can lead to increased dehydration.If you are outdoors.Remember: bring adequate sun protection.Avoid: activities between 10 am and 2 pm, the hottest part of the day.2.2 Warming up, cooling downStretching: helps to promote blood flow to your muscles,increases flexibility, andreduces the chance of getting a new injury or aggravating an old one.A gentle cool down period: less muscle stiffness and soreness.removing waste products from muscles, andreplacing them with nutrients and oxygen.Cautions: Try not to overdo it when beginning a new activity;build on your fitness levels, and set goals.2.3 The right equipmentEssential equipment: the correct footwear, especially in sports where knee and ankle injuries are common.Protective equipment: knee and elbow pads, helmets, gloves or shin pads.3. Treating an injury3.1 Broken bones and severe sporting injuries: a medical professional immediately.3.2 Less serious sprains and strains: RICE —Rest, Ice, Compress, and Elevate.4. Food and sport4.1 Time for food digestion before sport: one to four hours, longer if your sport involvesrunning.4.2 The ideal meal prior to sport: low in fat, and high in carbohydrates.【原文】Preventing Sporting InjuriesSports are obviously a great way to keep in shape for most people, and a great start on the road to a healthy lifestyle.Here are some tips for getting the most out of your fitness programs and preventing injury.Avoiding dehydrationWhatever sport your play, it is essential to maintain your fluid levels to avoid dehydration. Don’t rely on you r thirst as an indicator of fluid depletion; try to drink consistently before and during your sporting activity. Continuing to drink after you have finished will ensure that weight lost through fluid depletion is replaced. Remember that alcohol and any drinks containing caffeine can led to increased dehydration.If you are outdoors, always remember to bring adequate sum protection, and try to avoid scheduling activities between 10 am and 2 pm, the hottest part of the day.Warning up, cooling downYou can help to reduce the risk of a serious sporting injury by warming up prior to exercise and taking time to cool down after your activity. Stretching prior to exercise helps to promote blood flow to your muscles, increasing flexibility and reducing the chance of getting a new injury or aggravating an old one.A gentle cool down period means you will experience less muscle stiffness and soreness. It also helps to remove waste products form muscles you have used during your activity, replacing them with nutrients and oxygen.Try not to overdo it when beginning a new activity; build on your fitness levels and set goals. knowing your limits means you have less chance of sustaining a sporting injury—a lack offitness increase your chance of experiencing a heat-related injury such as heat exhaustion or heat stroke.The right equipmentNo matter what sport you play, the correct footwear is essential to absorb the impact of movement as well as provide adequate support for your ankles and feet. This is especially important in sports where knee and ankle injuries are common, such as netball and football. To help avoid injury, protective equipment such as knee and elbow pads, helmets, gloves or shin pads may be helpful in many contact sports or sports where there is a risk of crashing.Treating an injuryWhile broken bones and severe sporting injuries, such as concussions, should be treated by a medical professional immediately, less serious sprains and strains can initially be helped by the RICE method.Rest — no exercise or stretching or quick movements.Ice —should be applied for at least 20 minutes as soon as possible after the injury, then every four hours while you are awake, for the next 48 hours. Crushed ice cubes in a wet tea towel or packets of frozen peas are ideal. Be careful to protect your skin from the ice with oil, a paper towel or a tea towel.Compress — use a firm crepe or elastic pressure bandage on the affected joint or limb.Elevate — keep the injured arm or leg up.Food and sportAllow between one and four hours for your food to digest before you participate in any sporting activity, longer if your sport involves running. the ideal meal prior to sport is low in fat and high in carbohydrates —carbohydrates increase your store of glycogen, which fuels the muscles, while a low-fat meal helps you avoid a bloated feeling that may affect your performance.Task 12【答案】Mr. Jones was very fond of climbing mountains, so one year he went to Switzerland for his holidays. After he had climbed some easy mountains, he decided one day to climb a more difficult one; but he did not want to go up it alone, so he found a good Swiss guide, who had often climbed that mountain.At first it was not a difficult climb, but then they came to a place which was not so easy. The guide stopped, turned round and warned Mr. Jones. “Be careful here,”he said, “This is a dangerous place. You can easily fall, and if you do, you will fall straight down a very long way. But,” he cont inued calmly, “if you do fall here, don’t forget to look to the right while you are going down. There is quite an extraordinarily beautiful view there — much more beautiful than the one you can see from here.”。

现代大学英语听力unit1--unit2(全)

现代大学英语听力unit1--unit2(全)

Unit 1Task 1:【答案】A.Event Year Kenny G was born. 1956He toured Europe with his High School band. 1971He made his first solo album. 1982He won released his most successful album. 1993He won the Best Artist Award. 1994He broke the world record for playing a single note. 1997B.1) F2) F3) T【原文】Saxophonist Kenny G is now the world's most successful jazz musician. He was born in 1956 as Kenny Gorelick in Seattle, USA, and he learned to play the saxophone at an early age. When he was just 15 years old, he toured Europe with his High School band. After studying at Washington University he started his career as a musician. In 1982 he signed for Arista Records and made his first solo album Kenny G.Success came slowly at first, but during the 1990s Kenny became well-known on the international scene. He released Breathless, his most successful album so far in 1993, and in 1994 won the Best Artist Award at the 21st American Music Awards held in Los Angeles.As well as making records, he also found time to play in front of another famous saxophone player—US President Bill Clinton—at the "Gala for the President" concert in Washington, and to break the world record for playing a single note (45 minutes and 47 seconds!) at the J & R Music World Store in New York in 1997.During the last 20 years, Kenny G has played with superstars like Aretha Franklin, Michael Bolton and Whitney Houston, and he has sold more than 36 million albums worldwide... and he hasn't sung a note!Task 2:【答案】1) c2) d3) c【原文】Senn: Everybody always has this misconception that female policemen don't do the same thing as men do, you know. I've worked..Interviewer: That's not true?Senn: That is not true! I've worked my share of graveyard shifts, and, you know, split shifts, and double-back and no days off, and...Interviewer: Uh-huh...Senn: ...as much as the next guy. There's no distinction used if there's a male or female officer on duty. Two men on duty—I'll refer to as two men, ‟cause in myfield there's no difference between the genders. We're still the same. Okay, if there'stwo men on duty—just because one's a female, she still gets in on the same type ofcall. If there's a bar disturbance downtown, then we go too. There's been manytimes where being the only officer on duty—that's it! It‟s just me and whoeverelse is on duty in the county. They can come back me up if I need assistance. And itdoes get a little hairy. You go in there, and you have these great big, hugemonster-guys, and they're just drunker than skunks, and can't see three feet in frontof them. And when they see you, they see fifteen people, and you know... But still,there's enough...Interviewer: That's where the uniform is important, I should imagine.Senn: Sometimes, you kno w. If somebody is going to…or has a bad day, and they are out to get a cop, you know, it doesn't matter if you're, you know, boy, girl,infant or anything! When you've got that cop uniform on, they'll still take it out onyou.Interviewer: Yeah...Senn: But I think there's one advantage to being a female police officer. And that is the fact that most men still have a little respect, and they won't smack you as easy as theywould one of the guys.Interviewer: Uh-huh...Senn: But I'll tell you o ne thing I‟ve learned—I'd rather deal with ten drunk men that one drunk woman any day of the week!Interviewer: Well, why is that?Senn: Because women are so unpredictable. You cannot ever predict what a woman's going to do.Interviewer: Hmm...Senn: Especially, if she's agitated, you know.Interviewer: Emotionally upset.Senn: Yeah. I saw a lady one time just get mad at the guy she was withbecause he wouldn't buy her another drink— take off her high heel and layhis head wide open. Yuch! Oh, they can be so vicious, you know.Task 3:【答案】1) d2) b3) b4) b【原文】You are watching a film in which two men are having a fight. They hit one another hard. At the start they only fight with their fists. But soon they begin hitting one another over the headswith chairs. And so it goes on until one of the men crashes through a window—and falls thirty feet to the ground below. He is dead!Of course he isn't really dead. With any luck he isn't even hurt. Why? Because the men who fall out of high windows or jump from fast-moving trains, who crash cars of even catch fire, are professionals. They do this for a living. These men are called “stunt men”. That is to say, they perform “tricks”.There are two sides to their work. They actually do most of the things you see on the screen. For example, they fall from a high building. However, they do not fall on to hard ground but on to empty cardboard boxes covered with a mattress. Again, when they hit one another with chairs, the chairs are made of soft wood and when they crash through windows, the glass is made of sugar!But although their work depends on trick of this sort, it also requires a high degree of skill and training. Often a stunt man‟s success depends on careful timing. For example, w hen he is "blown up" in a battle scene, he has to jump out of the way of the explosion just at the right moment.Naturally stuntmen are well-paid for their work, but they lead dangerous lives. They often get seriously injured, and sometimes killed. A Norwegian stuntman, for example, skied over the edge of a cliff a thousand feet high. His parachute failed to open—and he was killed.In spite of all the risks, this is no longer a profession for “men only”. Men no longer dress up as women when actresses have to perform some dangerous action. For nowadays there are “stunt girls” too!Task 4:【答案】1) He started writing poetry when he was about 14 or 15.2) He has published four books.3) His first book came out when he was about 26. It wasn‟t easy. He got a lot of his work rejected at first.4) The British, or at least the English, are embarrassed by it. They‟re embarrassed by people who reveal personal feelings, emotions, thoughts and wishes.【原文】When Thomas Edison was born in the small town of Milan, Ohio, in 1847, America was just beginning its great industrial development. In his lifetime of eighty-four years, Edison shared in the excitement of America‟s growth into a modern nation. The time in which he lived was an age of invention, filled with human and scientific adventures, and Edison became the hero of that age.As a boy, Edison was not a good student. His parents took him out of school and his mother taught him at home, where his great curiosity and desire to experiment often got him into trouble. When he was six, he set fire to his father‟s barn “to see what would happen.” The barn burned down.When he was ten, Edison built his own chemistry laboratory. He sold sandwiches and newspapers on the trains in order to earn money to buy supplies for his laboratory. His parents became accustomed, more or less, to his experiments and the explosions which sometimes shook the house.Edison‟s work as a sales boy with the railroad introduced him to the telegraph and, with a friend, he built his own telegraph set.Six years later, in 1869, Edison arrived in New York City, poor and in debt. He went to work with a telegraph company. It was there that he became interested in the uses of electricity.Task 5:【答案】1815,1914,35millionI.A. villages,seaportB. danger,long ocean voyageC. a new land,a new languageD. finding a place to liveII.a better life,opportunity,freedomIII.A. England, Germany, Russia, HungaryB. Roman Catholic, JewishC. customs,languagesIV.A. Americanized,disappeared.B. haven't disappeared,customs,identitiesV.A. were cheated,prejudice,mistreatedB. hardest,least-paid,dirtiest,most overcrowdedD. rejected,old-fashioned,ashamedovercome【原文】Thousands of people came to American cities before Blacks and Puerto Ricans did. Between 1815 and 1914, more than 35 million Europeans crossed the ocean to find new homes in the United States.Most of these immigrants were ordinary people. Few were famous when they arrived. Few became famous afterward. Most had lived in small villages. Few had ever been far outside them. Most of them faced the same kinds of problems getting to America: the hardship of going from their villages to a seaport, the unpleasantness—even danger—of the long ocean voyage, the strangeness of a new land, and of a new language, the problem of finding a place to live, of finding work in a new, strange country.Every immigrant had his own reasons for coming to America. But nearly all shared one reason: They hoped for a better life. They considered America a special place, a land of opportunity, a land of freedom.Immigrants came from many different countries: England, Germany, Denmark, Finland[, Russia, Italy, Hungary and many others.They came with many different religions: Roman Catholic, Jewish, Quaker, Greek Orthodox.They brought many different customs and many languages.Some people have called the United States a "melting pot". After immigrants were here awhile—in the melting pot—they became Americanized. Differences were "melted down". They gradually disappeared.Some people say no. America isn't a melting pot. It's more like a salad bowl. Important differences between groups of people haven't disappeared. Many groups have kept their own ways, their customs, their identities, and this has given America great strength.Melting pot? Salad bowl? Perhaps there's some troth to both ideas.In any case, life in America was hard for most immigrants—especially at first. Often they were cheated. Often they met with prejudice. They were often laughed at, even mistreated, by people who themselves had been immigrants.Most of them soon found that the streets of America weren't paved with gold. They usually got the hardest jobs, and those that paid the least, the dirtiest places to live in, the most overcrowded tenements.They came to be citizens of a new country; but often they felt like people without a country. They had given up their own, but they didn't understand their new one. They didn't really feel a part of it. And the people of the new one didn't always welcome them.They came for the sake of their children, but in America their children often rejected them. To the children, their parents seemed old-fashioned. They didn't learn the new language quickly. Some didn't learn it at all. Their parents' customs made children ashamed.Gradually, however, problems were overcome. For most immigrants, life in America was better. It certainly was better for their children and for their grandchildren.Task 6:【答案】A.The Life Story of Thomas EdisonOhio,1847,industrial development, 1931, a modern nationI.A. curiosity,desireB. 1857,station master‟s sonC. 1863II.A. New York City,electricity,report the pricesB. New Jersey,invented,producedC. organized industrial researchD. 1877E. 1879III.A. 1,000B. motion-picture machineC. photographyD. streetcars,electric trainsIV.B. turn off all powerC. the progress of manB.1) F2) F3) T4) T5) F【原文】When Thomas Edison was born in the small town of Milan, Ohio, in 1847, America was just beginning its great industrial development. The time in which he lived was an age of invention, filled with human and scientific adventures, and Edison became the hero of that age.As a boy, Edison was not a good student. His parents took him out of school and his mother taught him at home, where his great curiosity and desire to experiment often got him into trouble. When he was ten, Edison built his own chemistry laboratory. He sold sandwiches and newspapers on the local trains in order to earn money to buy supplies for his laboratory. His parents became accustomed, more or less, to his experiments and the explosions which sometimes shook the house.Edison‟s work as a sales boy with the railroad introduced him to the telegraph and with a friend, he built his own telegraph set.He taught himself the Morse telegraphic code and hoped for the chance to become a professional telegraph operator. A stroke of luck and Edison's quick thinking soon provided the opportunity.One day, as young Edison stood waiting for a train to arrive, he saw the station master's sot wander into the track of an approaching train. Edison rushed out and carried the boy to safety. The thankful station master offered to teach Edison railway telegraphy. Afterwards, in 1863, he became tan expert telegraph operator and left home to work in various cities.Six years later, in 1869, Edison arrived in New York City, poor and in debt. He went to work with a telegraph company. It was there that he became interested in the uses of electricity. At that time electricity was still in the experimental stages, and Edison hoped to invent new ways to use it for the benefit of people. As he once said: "My philosophy of life is work. I want to bring out the secrets of, nature and apply them for the happiness of man. I know of no better service to render for the short time we are in this world."The same year, when he was only 22 years old, Edison invented an improved ticker-tape machine which could better report the prices on the New York Market. The ticker-tape machine was successful, and Edison decided to leave his job and concentrate wholly on inventing. When the president of the telegraph company asked how much they owed him for his invention, Edison was ready to accept only $3,000. Cautiously he said: "Suppose you make me an offer.""How would $40,000 strike you?" the president inquired. Edison almost fainted, but he finally replied that the price was fair.With this money, and now calling himself an electrical engineer, Edison formed his own "invention factory" in Newark, New Jersey. Over the next few years he invented and produced many new items, including the mimeograph machine, wax wrapping paper, and improvements of the telegraph.In 1877 Edison decided he could no longer continue both manufacturing and inventing. He sold his share in the factory and built a new laboratory in Menlo Park, New Jersey. It was the first laboratory of its kind devoted to organized industrial research. One of the first inventions to come from his new laboratory was an improvement of Alexander Bell's telephone. Edison invented a more powerful mouthpiece which removed the need to shout into the telephone. But his greatinventions were still to come.On August 12, 1877, Edison began experimenting with an instrument which he had designed and ordered to be built. It was a cylinder, wrapped in tinfoil and turned by a handle. As it revolved, a needle made a groove in the foil. Turning the handle, Edison began to shout."Mary had a little lambWhose fleece was white as snow!"He stopped and moved the needle back in the starting position. Then, putting his ear close to the needle, he turned the handle again. A voice came out of the machine:"Mary had a little lamb,Whose fleece was white as snow!"Edison had just invented the phonograph, a completely new concept: a talking machine.While he was perfecting his phonograph, Edison also worked on another invention. He called it "an Electric Lamp for Giving Light by Incandescence". Today we call it the light bulb.For years other inventors had experimented with electric lights, but none of the lights had proven economical to produce. Edison, in studying the problem, spent over a year experimenting. He tested 1,600 materials (even hairs from a friend's beard) to see if they would carry electric current and glow. Finally, on October 21, 1879, he tried passing electricity through a carbonized cotton thread in a vacuum glass bulb. In his own words Edison described the experiment: "... before nightfall the carbon was completed and inserted in the lamp. The bulb was exhausted of air and sealed, the current turned on, and the sight we had so long desired to see met our eyes." The lamp gave off a feeble, reddish glow, and it continued to bum for 40 hours. Edison's incredible invention proved that electric lighting would be the future light of the world.Edison was now so famous as an inventor that people thought there was nothing he could not do. They began to call him "the wizard", as if he could produce an invention like magic. Few people realized how hard Edison worked, often 20 hours a day, and that most of his inventions were the results of hundreds of experiments.For 60 years Edison was the world's leading inventor. He patented over 1,000 inventions which changed our way of living. He was one of the earliest inventors of the motion-picture machine. His invention of the phonograph was joined with photography to produce talking pictures. He also perfected the electric motor which made streetcars and electric trains possible.It is no wonder that Edison received many honors during his life for contributions to the progress of mankind. The United States gave him its highest award, a special Congressional Medal of Honor. Yet, in spite of all his fame, Edison remained a modest man. He preferred to continue his work, rather than rest on his achievements. His motto was: "I find what the world needs; then I go ahead and try to invent it." He never considered himself a brilliant man and once remarked that genius was "2 percent inspiration and 98 percent perspiration".When Edison died in 1931, it was proposed that the American people mm off all power in their homes, streets, and factories for several minutes in honor of this great man. Of course, it was quickly realized that such an honor would be impossible. Its impossibility was indeed the real tribute to Edison's achievements. Electric power had become so important and vital a part of America's life that a complete shut-down for even a few seconds would have created chaos. As "one of the great heroes of invention", Edison rightfully belongs among America's and the world's great contributors to the progress of man.Task 7:【答案】A.1) c2) a3) d4) c5) c6) aB.1) That‟s because the explosion robs the fire of oxygen.2) Once the fire is out, the well still needs to be covered, or capped, to stop the flow of oil. This is the most dangerous part of the process. Any new heat or fire could cause the leaking well and the surrounding area to explode.3) In March of 1991, Red Adair went to Kuwait. He and his crews were called in to help put out oil well fires.4) He has spent his 76th birthday in Kuwait working side by side with his crew.5) At his funeral, many family members and friends honored him by wearing red clothes.【原文】Paul Neal Adair was born in Houston, Texas in nineteen fifteen. He was one of five sons of a metal worker. He also had three sisters. While growing up, he became known as Red Adair because his hair was bright red. The color became a trademark for Adair. He wore red clothes and red boots. He drove a red car, and his crew members used red trucks and red equipment.During World War Two, Adair served on a trained army team that removed and destroyed bombs. After the war, he returned to Houston and took a job with Myron Kinley. At the time, Kinley was the leader in putting out fires in oil wells. Red Adair worked with Myron Kinley for fourteen years. But in nineteen fifty-nine, Adair started his own company.During his thirty-six years in business, Red Adair and his crews battled more than two thousand fires all over the world. Some were on land. Others were on ocean oil-drilling structures. Some fires were in burning oil wells. Others were in natural gas wells.Red Adair was a leader in a specialized and extremely dangerous profession. Putting out oil well fires can be difficult. This is because oil well fires are extinguished, or put out, at the wellhead just above ground. Normally, explosives are used to stop the fire from burning. The explosion robs the fire of oxygen. But, once the fire is out, the well still needs to be covered, or capped, to stop the flow of oil. This is the most dangerous part of the process. Any new heat or fire could cause the leaking well and the surrounding area to explode.Red Adair developed modern methods to extinguish and cover burning oil wells.They became known in the industry as Wild Well Control techniques. In addition to explosives, the techniques involved large amounts of water and dirt. Adair also developed special equipment made of bronze metal to help extinguish oil well fires. The modern tools and his Wild Well Control techniques earned Red Adair and his crews the honor of being called the "best in the business."Red Adair was known for not being afraid. He was also known for his sense of calm and safety. None of his workers were ever killed while putting out oil well or gas fires. He described his work this way: “It scares you—all the noise, the rattling, the shaking. But the look on everyone's face, when you are finished and packing, it is the best smile in the world; and there is nobody hurt, and the well is under control.”One of Red Adair's most important projects was in nineteen sixty-two. He and his crew put out a natural gas fire in the Sahara Desert in Algeria. The fire had been burning for six months. This famous fire was called the "Devil's Cigarette Lighter." Fire from the natural gas well shot about one hundred forty meters into the air. The fire was so big that American astronaut John Glenn could see it from space as he orbited Earth.The desert sand around the well had melted into glass from the extreme heat. News reports said Adair used about three hundred forty kilograms of nitroglycerine explosive material to pull the oxygen out of the fire.Adair's success with the "Devil's Cigarette Lighter" and earlier well fires captured the imagination of the American film industry. In nineteen sixty-eight, Hollywood made an actionfilm called Hellfighters. It was loosely based on events in Red Adair's life. Actor John Wayne played an oil well firefighter from Houston, Texas whose life was similar to Adair's. Adair served as an advisor to Wayne while the film was being made. The two men became close friends. Adair said one of the best honors in the world was to have John Wayne play him in a movie.In nineteen eighty-eight, Adair fought what was possibly the world's worst off-shore accident. It was at the Piper Alpha drilling structure in the North Sea. Occidental Petroleum operated the structure off the coast of Scotland. The structure produced oil and gas from twenty-four wells.One hundred sixty-seven men were killed when the structure exploded after a gas leak. Red Adair had to stop the fires and cap the wells. He faced winds blowing more than one hundred twenty kilometers an hour, and ocean waves at least twenty meters high.In March of nineteen ninety-one, Red Adair went to Kuwait following the Persian Gulf War. He and his crews were called in to help put out fires set by the Iraqi army.The Red Adair Company capped more than one hundred wells. His crews were amongtwenty-seven teams from sixteen countries called in to fight the fires. The crews' efforts put out about seven hundred Kuwaiti fires. Their efforts saved millions of barrels of oil. Some experts say the operation also helped prevent an environmental tragedy. The job had been expected to take three to five years. However, it was completed in just eight months.Red Adair had spent his seventy-sixth birthday in Kuwait working side by side with his crew. When asked when he might retire, he told reporters: "Retire? I do not know what that word means. As long as a man is able to work, and he is productive out there and he feels good—keep at it."Still, Red Adair finally did retire in nineteen ninety-four. At that time, he joked about where he would end up when he died. He said he hoped to be in Heaven. But he said this about Hell: "I have made a deal with the devil. He said he is going to give me an air-conditioned place when I go down there—if I go there—so I won't put all the fires out."Red Adair died in two thousand four. He was eighty-nine years old. At his funeral, many family members and friends honored him by wearing red clothes. Many Americans remember Red Adair for his bravery. He lived his life on the edge of danger. He was known for his willingness to risk his own life to save others.Task 8:【答案】A.1) She was born in New York City in 1884.2) After she finished school, Eleanor began teaching children to read in one of the poorest areas of New York City. She investigated factories where workers were said to be badly treated. She became involved with other women who shared the same ideas about improving social conditions.3) She decided she would no longer play the part of a politician's wife. Instead, she began to builda life with interests of her own.4) Franklin Roosevelt was elected president in 1932. His new economic program was called the New Deal.5) She was different from the wives of earlier presidents in that she was the first to become active in political and social issues.6) She publicly resigned her membership to protest the action of the group.7) She spent the last years of her life visiting foreign countries. She became America's unofficial ambassador. She called on Americans to help the people in developing countries.B.1) F2) T3) T【原文】Eleanor Roosevelt was the wife of America's thirty-second president, Franklin Delano Roosevelt. She helped her husband in many ways during his long political life. She also became one of the most influential people in America. She fought for equal rights for all people -- workers, women, poor people, black people. And she sought peace among nations.Anna Eleanor Roosevelt was born in New York City in eighteen eighty-four. Eleanor's family had great wealth and influence. When she was eight years old, her mother died. Two years later, her father died. It was Eleanor's grandmother who raised the Roosevelt children.After she finished school, Eleanor began teaching children to read in one of the poorest areas of New York City, called "Hell's Kitchen." She investigated factories where workers were said to be badly treated. She saw little children of four and five years old working until they dropped to the floor. She became involved with other women who shared the same ideas about improving social conditions.Franklin Roosevelt began visiting Eleanor. Franklin belonged to another part of the Roosevelt family. Franklin and Eleanor were married in nineteen-oh-five. In the next eleven years, they had six children.Franklin Roosevelt began his life in politics in New York. He was elected to be a state legislator. Later, President Woodrow Wilson appointed him to be assistant secretary of the Navy. The Roosevelts moved to Washington in nineteen thirteen. It was there, after thirteen years of marriage, that Eleanor Roosevelt went through one of the hardest periods of her life. Shediscovered that her husband had fallen in love with another woman. She wanted to end the marriage. But her husband urged her to remain his wife.She did. Yet her relationship with her husband changed. She decided she would no longer play the part of a politician's wife. Instead, she began to build a life with interests of her own.Eleanor Roosevelt learned about politics and became involved in issues and groups that interested her. In nineteen twenty-two, she became part of the Women's Trade Union League. She also joined the debate about ways to stop war. In those years after World War One, she argued that America must be involved in the world to prevent another war. "Peace is the question of the hour," she once told a group of women. "Women must work for peace to keep from losing their loved ones."The question of war and peace was forgotten as the United States entered a severe economic depression in nineteen twenty-nine. Prices suddenly dropped on the New York stock market. Banks lost their money. People lost their jobs.Franklin Roosevelt was elected president in nineteen thirty-two. He promised to end the Depression and put Americans back to work. Mrs. Roosevelt helped her husband by spreading information about his new economic program. It was called the New Deal. She traveled around the country giving speeches and visiting areas that needed economic aid.Eleanor Roosevelt was different from the wives of earlier presidents. She was the first to become active in political and social issues. While her husband was president, Missus Roosevelt held more than three hundred news conferences for female reporters. She wrote a daily newspaper commentary. She wrote for many magazines. These activities helped spread her ideas to all Americans and showed that women had important things to say.One issue Eleanor Roosevelt became involved in was equal rights for black Americans. She met publicly with black leaders to hear their problems. Few American politicians did this during the nineteen thirties and nineteen forties. One incident involving Eleanor Roosevelt became international news.In nineteen thirty-nine, an American singer, Marian Anderson, planned a performance at Constitution Hall in Washington. But a conservative women's group refused to permit her to sing there because she was black.Missus Roosevelt was a member of that organization, the Daughters of the American Revolution. She publicly resigned her membership to protest the action of the group. An opinion study showed that most Americans thought she was right.Eleanor Roosevelt helped the performance to be held outdoors, around the Lincoln Memorial. More than seventy thousand people heard Marian Anderson sing. Eleanor Roosevelt was always considered one of its strongest supporters of the civil rights movement.。

现代大学英语听力2听力原文及题目答案Unit 2

现代大学英语听力2听力原文及题目答案Unit  2

《现代大学英语听力2》听力原文及题目答案Unit 2Unit 2Task 1【答案】1) b 2) a 3) d【原文】Texas was the biggest state before Alaska became the forty-ninth state in 1959. One good way to understand the size of Texas is to learn about its weather. Different parts of the state have very different kinds of weather.Laredo is one of the hottest cities in the United States in summer. The best time to visit Laredo is in winter, when it is pleasantly warm.Amarillo gets very cold in winter. Sometimes there is more snow in Amarillo than in New York, which is a northern city. Summers are better, but sometimes it gets quite hot. The best time to visit Amarillo is in the autumn when it is cool.If anyone asks you about the weather in Texas, ask him, “What part of Texas do you mean”Task 2【答案】A.1)T 2) F 3) FB.1) d 2) c 3) cC.climate, reputation, extraordinary, unreliable, dry, wet, clear, dull, hot, cold, bad, mild【原文】Our friend, Nick, whose English gets better and better, declared solemnly the other day that he thought that the British climate was wonderful, but the British weather was terrible. He went on to explain by pointing out that the British climate was a temperate one. This meant, he said, "that you could always be certain that the weather would never be extreme — at any rate not for any length of time — never very hot and never very cold." He quite rightly pointed out that the rainfall in Britain, according to the statistics, was not very heavy. "Why then," he asked, "has the British climate such a bad reputation" He answered by saying it was because of the extraordinary, unreliable weather. There was no part of the year at which you could be certain that the weather would be dry or wet, clear or dull, hot or cold. A bad day in July could be as cold as a mild day in January. Indeed you could feel cold at almost any time of the year. Nick blamed drafty British houses for this, but agreed you could also blame the small amount of sunshine and a great amount of dampness. He advised every student coming to Britain to bring an umbrella and to understand the meaning of that splendid word "drizzle".Task 3【答案】I.the country; Trees, grass, lakes and steamsII.A.1. concrete, iron, steel2. take in the heat during the day and throw off heat into the air at nightB. Warmer winters, car engines; electrical applianceⅢ.A. air pollution may stop sunlight from reaching the earthB.1. Ice near the North and South poles to melt2. to be slowly flooded and people living in these cities to move to higher land【原文】Cities change the climate around you. In the country, there are trees, grass, lakes, and streams. In hot weather, the trees and grass cool the area around them. Lakes and rivers also cool the area around them.But cities are not cooled in these natural ways. Cities are built of asphalt, concrete, iron, and steel. There are few trees and usually not much grass. Rain falls onto the streets and into the sewers.When the summer sun shines, streets and buildings take in the heat; after the sun sets, the streets and buildings throw off heat into the street. Once the sun sets, the countryside cools off, but a city may stay hot all night.Cities are hotter than the countryside in winter, too. Standing near a car with its motor running, winter or summer, you will feel the heat thrown off by the engine. The heat comes from the gasoline burned by the engine. This heat warms the air and the ground around the car. Thousands of running cars are almost like thousands of small fires burning.Carefully put your hand near a light bulb or television set. As you can see, electricity creates a lot of heat. This heat from electricity warms the house and the outside air.The heat given off by cities can affect the climate. Some experts even believe that cities can change the climate of the whole world. They think that air pollution may stop sunlight from reaching the earth. If less sunshine reaches the earth, the earth may become cooler.Still other experts think the world will get warmer. If the world did get warmer, great changes would occur. Ice near the North and South poles would melt. This would make the oceans rise. Cities near oceans — like Los Angeles, Boston, and Miami — would slowly be flooded. People living in these cities would have to move to higher land.Task 4【答案】A.1) b 2) cB. night, delight; morning, warning; gray, way, red, headC.1) F 2) T 3) F【原文】A red sky at either dusk or dawn is one of the spectacular and beautiful weather predictors we have in nature. By closely observing this phenomenon, you can achieve short-range accuracy of the weather as good as, or better than your local weatherman. In the Bible, Jesus in Matthew 16, 2-3 is quoted as saying, “When it is evening, it will be fair weather: for the sky is red. And in the morning it will be foul weather today: for the sky is red” when speaking to the Pharisees. An old English weather proverb based on this passage is:Red sky at night, sailors delight.Red sky at morning, sailors take warning.OrEvening red and morning gray,Sends the traveler on his way.Evening gray, morning red,Brings the rain down on his head.At dusk, a red sky indicates that dry weather is on the way. This is due to the sun shining through dust particles being pushed ahead of a high pressure system bringing in dry air. A red sky in the morning is due to the sun again shining through dust. In this case however, the dust is being pushed on by an approaching low reassure system bringing in moisture. Don't confuse a red sky in the morning with a red sun in the morning. If the sun itself is red and the sky is a normal color, the day will be fair.Task 5【答案】1) c 2) b 3) d 4) c 5) c【原文】Mark: I am an avid fly fisherman and frequently find myself on the river in a raft during lightning storms. We always have a debate at these times on where weare safest — pulling into shore or staying on the water. Since I have heard oneis safe in a car when lightning strikes I wonder if the raft floating on the wateris insulated, and therefore the safest place to be.Meteorologist A: We spoke with some scientists about your question, and they all agreed that under no circumstances should you remain on the water during a lightningstorm. If your raft is made of rubber, you might feel that you're .well insulated,but don't kid yourself. Typical lightning flashes travel 10 to 15 kilometers andcan deliver as much as 100,000 amps of current. In comparison, a toaster usesabout 10 amps of current. If lightning strikes the water near you, it will have notrouble traveling through a few extra centimeters of rubber.Meteorologist B: So, if you're on the water and a thunderstorm approaches, get to the shore and seek shelter on land. Try a building or car. If neither is available, look for a cave,cliff, wall, or a group of trees. Never take shelter under an isolated tree-it's alsoa good target for lightning.Task 6【答案】A.1) F 2) T 3) F 4) T 5) F 6) TB.Incredible, one minute, one kilometer, destroyed, lifted up, carried away, killed, injured【原文】Every spring and summer many inland areas are hit by tornados. A tornado is a kind of storm. It's a revolving, funnel-shaped column of air that moves through the sky at very high speeds. A tornado looks like a huge, black ice cream cone whirling through the sky. The speed of a tornado is very fast-it is believed to be between 200 and 700 kilometers per hour.Tornados form under very special weather conditions, and these special weather conditions occur most often in inland areas, such as the central United States. A tornado forms when a layer of warm, dry air is on top of a layer of cooler, moist air. This combination of dry, warm air above wet, cool air creates a condition that causes the lower layer of air to lift up. As the lower air rises, both layers of air begin to rotate, to turn around and around. The air begins to rotate faster and faster because of centrifugal force. The tornado has a center called an “eye” and the air rotates quickly around this eye.As the air begins to rotate faster and faster, the tornado cloud begins to grow downward; that is, it begins to form a funnel or cone, and this cone goes down toward the ground.The cone of air is dark because it develops from a dark rain cloud. As the cloud gets longer, as the cloud gets closer to the ground, it begins to pull up dirt from the ground. Then the funnel ofrotating air becomes very dark because of the dirt in it. As the tornado funnel gets longer, it begins to drag along the ground.When the tornado touches the ground, it does incredible damage. It usually touches the ground for only about one minute, and it usually travels along the ground for only about one kilometer, but during that one minute, buildings are destroyed, trees are lifted up out of the ground, small objects are carried away, and sometimes people are injured or killed.Task 7【答案】A.1) b 2) a 3) bB.1) It has been nice weather during the day, but it is going to change at night.2) Fine weather in southern Europe and not so nice in northern EuropeFor todaySoutheast England---26 degrees Celsius by mid-afternoonSouthern Scotland---Maximum temperatures of around 21 degreesBrighton---15 hours of lovely sunshineMidlands---23 degrees Celsius by early afternoonNorthwest of Scotland---Light showers around middayFor the weekendSpain---34 degrees CelsiusGreece---32 degrees CelsiusFrance---Cloudy with rain, maximum temperatures of 22 degreesNorthern Ireland---Heavy rain, 17 degrees CelsiusMost of England---Cloudy but mainly dry with sunny periods, 23 degrees Celsius【原文】Radio Announcer: You’re listening to Radio Metro. It’s two minutes to nine, and time for the latest weather for cast from Dan Francis at the London Weather Centre.Francis: Hello. It's been another warm and fine day for most of us. Temperatures in southeast England reached 26 degrees Celsius by mid-afternoon, and Brighton had 15 hours of lovely sunshine. Further north it was a little cooler with maximum temperatures of around 21 degrees in southern Scotland, and in the far northwest of Scotland there were some light showers aroundmidday. But the rest of the country, as I said, has been warm and dry with temperatures in the Midlands reaching 23 degrees Celsius by early afternoon though it was a little cooler along the west coast and in Northern Ireland. But already the weather is beginning to change, I'm afraid, and during the night showers will slowly move in from the Atlantic to reach south-west England and the southern coast of Wales by early morning.The rest of the country will have a very mild, dry night with minimum temperatures no lower than 15 degrees in the south, a little cooler — 11degrees or so — in the north. Any remaining showers in northwest Scotland will pass quickly to leave a mild, dry night there too.And now the outlook for Friday and the weekend. Well, southern Europe will, once again, get the best of the weekend weather, and if your holiday starts this weekend, then southern Spain is the place to go, with temperatures of 34 degrees along the Mediterranean coast. At the eastern end of the Med, too, you can expect uninterrupted sunshine and temperatures of up to 32 degrees Celsius in Greece and southeast Italy, but further north the weather's not so settled. Much of France, Belgium and the Netherlands will be cloudy with occasional rain, and maximum temperatures will be around 22 degrees — very disappointing for this time of the year. Scotland and Northern Ireland will have heavy rain for much of the weekend and temperatures will drop to a cool 17 degrees. Across most of England the weather will be cloudy but mainly dry with sunny periods. And when the sun does come out, temperatures could rise to a maximum of 23 degrees.Task 8【答案】As the air pressure around you either rises or falls, many changes in nature occur. Most of these are very obvious changes while others are of a more subtle nature.Mountains and other far away objects will appear to be much closer and more sharply focused as wet weather approaches and the air pressure drops. The dust particles in the air begin to settle to the ground and the air clears, allowing you to see more details of faraway objects. As a high pressure front approaches and the air becomes “thicker,” more dust particles become suspended in air and things take on their normal somewhat hazy appearance.“Sharp horns on the moon threaten bad weather.” This and a bright, clear moon are goodindicators that wet weather is on the way. As the air clears of dust particles ahead of a low pressure system, the moon appears to come closer and be more sharply focused due to the lack of dust.Sound also becomes sharper and more focused prior to stormy weather. Instead of traveling upward and outward into the atmosphere sound waves are bent back to the earth and their range extended. Bird calls sound sharper, and, at my house, we can hear the blowing of the train horn as it rumbles through the valley below.If you find yourself out in a marsh or swamp and the air really seems to stink more than normal, expect rainy weather. This happens when the pressure drops and the methane trapped on the bottom of the swamp is released in greater quantities. In reverse, as fair weather approaches and the pressure rises, things won't smell quite so strong.Birds and bats have a tendency to fly much lower to the ground right before a rain due to the “thinning” of the air. They prefer to fly where the air is the most dense and they can get greater lift with their wings. With high pressure and dry air, the atmosphere becomes denser and they can easily fly at higher altitudes.Smoke rising straight into the air means fair weather and smoke hanging low means rain is on the way. This is pretty much the same as with the birds and methane in the swamp. When high pressure approaches, smoke will rise whereas with low pressure it can't rise and tends to lay low.Remember a grandparent talking about how their corns, bunions, or joints ached right before a rain Again, this is due to the decreasing atmospheric pressure allowing the gas in our bodies to expand.Task 9【答案】A. Statements 3, 6, 7 are true.B.f—c—a—d—b—eC.1) F 2) T 3) F 4) FD.1) d 2) b【原文】It was 1974. Richard Nixon was still president. Kidnapped heiress Patty Hearst was still missing. In Xenia, a pretty spot of 25,000 people amid fields of soybeans and corn, American Graffiti was held over at the Cinema. The Xenia Hotel offered a chicken and dumpling dinner for $, but everyone flocked to the A&W drive-in for burgers and root beer floats. That's where five of the bodies were found after the storm.In all, 33 people died in Xenia's tornado, the deadliest of 148 storms that raged through 13 states during the infamous "Super Outbreak'' of tornadoes April 3 to 4, 1974. In 16 hours and 10 minutes, 330 people were killed and nearly 5,550 were injured from Illinois to Georgia.Though the Xenia death toll has been matched by other killer storms, the degree of devastation makes the city's tornado among U.S. history's most destructive. The storm still is studied in colleges by aspiring meteorologists, a textbook case of a rare Category F-5, the most intense of tornadoes.On that fateful day, I was a young boy of 8 years old. We lived in the Arrowhead Subdivision. That afternoon I was around the corner playing with some neighbor kids. I thought I could hear my father calling me, so I ran back to the house. Thinking back now, there is no way I would have been able to hear him. I was too far away for a voice to have traveled in the afternoon noise. Besides, Dad had a very bad case of tonsillitis that day. Like I was saying, I went back home and got through the door just in time to answer the ringing phone. On the other end of the phone was my Mother. Mom was working. She told me she heard a bad storm was on the way. She told me to make sure the garage door was shut and to stay inside. After I hung up the phone, I settled down to watch The Dennis Show. To this day I can vividly remember the electricity going out. I looked out the large window in the living room and didn't have a clue as to what I was looking at.Dad was asleep on the couch, so I woke him up to look. Dad looked and said to get into the bathroom. We sat on the floor. Dad had his back to the door and his feet pushing against the wall opposite the door. I remember that as soon as we sat down, the windows broke. Glass blew under the door, and the sound was tremendous. I know it really didn’t take too long for the tornado to go past, but I do remember the conversation we had in the process. I could feel the cool air rushing under the floor through the crawlspace vents. I asked if we were flying. He said he wasn't sure, but he didn't think we were. He said the house was tearing apart. I asked him how he knew. He said he just knew it was.When things calmed down, we opened the door. The odd feeling I had, looking up the street from inside what once was my hallway, is still with me today.I think back often to that day. I think back and wonder what would have happened if my Dad hadn't been sick that day. Like a lot of kids, I stayed home by myself after school back then. I seriously doubt I would be able to tell you my story, if I had been alone that day. I still live in Xenia and wouldn’t trade this town for any other.Task 10【原文】Undoubtedly, Tibet is one of the harshest places for human existence. It is cool in summer but freezing cold in winter. In Lhasa, the mildest city temperature may exceed 29C in summer while plummeting to -16C in winter! Sun radiation is extremely strong in Tibet. The sunlight in Lhasa is so intense that the city is called Sunlight City. The thin air can neither block off nor retain heat so that the temperature extremes can be met in daytime and the same night respectively in Tibet. However it is not impossible to visit the holy snow land. April to October is the best time to visit Tibet, out of the coldest months, which are from December to February usually. The average temperature in north Tibet is subzero and winter arrives in October until the following May or June. July and August are the best time to visit the area, enjoying warm temperature, intense sunshine, beautiful scenery and festive events. May, June and September is the tourist season in east Tibet. In winter, roads are all blocked by heavy snow. Landslides and rock falls frequently occur, which will make travel difficult.。

现代大学英语听力Unit原文及答案完整版

现代大学英语听力Unit原文及答案完整版

U n i t 2Task 1【答案】A.1) elephants2) chimpanzees3) giraffes4) penguins5) kangaroos6) zebras7) polar bearsB.1) and a tail2) big ears【原文】1) They live in Africa and India. They have four legs and a tail. They are very big and very strong. They are intelligent, too. They have a trunk and some of them have tusks. They sometimes live for 70 years.2) They live in Africa and Asia. They are brown. They have arms and legs, but they don’t have a tail. Their arms are very long and they have big ears. They are good climbers. They are very intelligent, too.3) They live in Africa. They are very tall. They have four legs, a tail and a very long neck. They eat leaves and twigs. They can run very fast. They are brown and white.4) They live in very cold countries. They have wings, but they can’t fly. They are good swimmers. They eat fish. They are blue and white or black and white.5) They live in Australia. They are red or gray. They have short front legs, long back legs and a very long tail. The back legs and the tail are very strong. They can run very fast. The females carry their young in a pouch.6) They live in Africa. They have four legs and a tail. They have a beautiful coat with black and white or brown and white stripes. They eat grass and plants.7) They live in very cold countries. They have four legs. They are very big and very strong. They have a white coat. They can swim. They eat seals and fish.Task 2【答案】A.1) The cheetah.2) 170 km/h.3) More than 100 km/h.4) Because most animals run on four legs.5) Because we have machines.B.1) F, 2) F, 3) T【原文】The fastest animal on land is the cheetah. It can run at a speed of about 100 kilometres an hour. The fastest bird in the world can fly at 170 km/h, and the fastest fish can swim at more than 100 km/h.Human beings are not very fast. The fastest man in the world can only run at about 40 km/h.Many animals can run faster than this. But most animals run on four legs. Four legs are better than two, aren’t they Why do we only have two legsScientists say that we are more intelligent than other animals because we stand on two legs, so we can use our hands for other things. We can pick things up with them. We can use tools. Human beings have used tools for millions of years. That is why our brains have developed. That is why we have become the most intelligent animals in the world.In the past few years, we have made all kinds of machines. We have made cars, ships, aeroplanes and spacecraft. In these machines we can travel faster than any animal—by land, by sea, or by air. We can even go to the moon. No other animal has ever done that!Task 3【答案】A.1) Climate, lack of food and aliens from outer space might be responsible for their extinction.2) No.B.B: might have gotten, killed them offA: may have run out of foodB: could have been destroyed by aliens【原文】A: You know, we’re studying dinosaurs in science class.It’s really interesting.B: Oh, yeah Hey, have you learned why the dinosaurs disappearedA: Well, no one knows for sure.B: I thought it had something to do with the climate. The temperature might have gotten cooler and killed them off.A: Yeah, that’s one theory. Another idea is that they may have run out of food.B: Uh-huh. And you know, there’s even a theory that they could have been destroyed by aliens from outer space. A: That sounds crazy to me!Task 4【答案】1) The mayfly. A few hours.2) They just do two things: finding a mate and producing young.3) We could judge by its growth rings.4) It was kept for 152 years.【原文】For the shortest life, the first prize must go to the mayfly, which typically lives only a matter of a few hours after it emerges from its shell. Few mayflies live to see the sun rise again. These creatures devote their whole lives to a single desperate mission: finding a mate and producing young. They don’t even have functional mouths and stomachs. They simply have no time to eat. In fact they have no time for anything else.The record-holder for the longest life may be the Arctic clam, one of which lived quietly underwater for 220 years. However it did not have any birth certificate to prove this. One could only judge by its growth rings.If you insist on better documentation, the oldest animal ever was probably a tortoise that died in 1918. It had been captured already full-grown in 1766, nine years before the American Revolution began and it died 152 years later as World War I came to a close.Task 5【答案】A.People have different opinions on using animals for research.B.1) fora. was tried first on animals.b. is dependent onc. using unwanted animals.2) againsta. sufferb. unnecessaryc. the same rights3)a. cell cultureb. computer modeling.【原文】Every year about 17 million animals are used in Laboratory experiments. But in many countries today, a difficult question is being asked: Do we have the right to use animals in this wayPeople who are for using animals in research argue that the use of animals in medical research has many practical benefits. Animal research has enabled researchers to develop treatments for many diseases, such as heart disease and depression. It would not have been possible to develop vaccines for diseases like smallpox and polio without animal research. Every drug anyone takes today was tried first on animals.Future medical research is dependent on the use of animals. Which is more important: the life of a rat or that of a three-year-old childMedical research is also an excellent way of using unwanted animals. Last year, over 12 million animals had to be killed in animal shelters because no one wanted them as pets.However those who are against it point out that the fact that humans benefit cannot be used to justify using animals in research any more than it can be used to justify experimenting on other humans. Animals suffer a lot during these experiments. They are forced to live in small cages, and they may be unable to move.Much of the research that is carried out is unnecessary anyway.Animals have the same rights as humans do— to be able to move freely and not to have pain or fear forced on them. Researchers must find other ways of doing their research, using cell culture and computer modeling. There should be no animals in research laboratories at all.Task 6【答案】A.1) No.2) Because zoo officials want him to produce cubs with another female tiger, so they don’t want him to become too interested in this family.B.1) four months2) 13 kilograms3) horse meat, their mother’s milk.4) the National Zoo’s WebsiteC.1) c, 2) c, 3) b【原文】Visitors to the National Zoo in Washington D. C. can see three new young tigers. The rare babies met the public for the first time late last month. Ch ip O’Neal tells us about them.The mother tiger sat nearby on the grass as her babies rolled, chased and bit each other playfully. Then Korenchy also jumped into the games. Her cubs were born at the zoo four months ago. They are called Mike, Eric and Chrisy. The new young tigers at the National Zoo each weigh about 13 kilograms. Their fur is dark orange with black stripes. They eat horse meat and drink milk from Korenchy.Korenchy and her babies are Sumatran tigers. Sumatran tigers came from the Indonesian island of Sumatra. They are now in danger of disappearing from the earth. Fewer than 500 of these tigers remain in the world. That includes about 60 living in zoos in North America.Korenchy came to the National Zoo from the Jakarta Zoo in Indonesia. The girl was part of the Sumatran Tiger Species Survival Program. Korenchy has given birth to live cubs three tines. The father of her new cubs is Rokan, a Sumatran tiger who arrived two years ago from another zoo. Korenchy and Rokan had their babies the natural way instead of the scientific method often used to produce young animals in zoos.A wire fence separates Rokan from his babies. Zoo workers who care for Rokan say he reaches through the fence to wash the cubs with his tongue. They say this means he recognizes Mike, Eric and Chrisy as his cubs. However, zoo officials are hoping that Rokan will produce more cubs with another female Sumatran tiger at the zoo, so they do not want him to become too interested in this family.The National Zoo hopes to keep the Sumatran tiger cubs for at least 18 months before sending them to other zoos. That is about the age when most tiger cubs in the wild leave their mothers. The National Zoo has placed cameras in the Sumatran tigers’ living area, so people with computers can see them. To do this, use your computer to find the National Zoo’s Website at natzoo.Task 7【答案】A.1) Cats have been more popular, because there are more pet cats in American homes.2) About 8,000 years3) They probably arrived in the United States from Europe.4) No.B.1)a) food especially prepared for catsb) other equipmentc) with images of catsd) in special burial grounds2)a) pleasureb) carec) being aloned) independentC.1) F, 2) F, 3) T, 4) F, 5) F【原文】An old expression says, “Man’s best friend is his dog.” Today, however, it seems that cats have replaced dogs as the most popular pets in American homes.Americans have more than 62 million pet dogs. But even more cats— more than 64 million — live in American homes.These pet cats may have long hair or short hair. They are different colors and sizes. Some are costly animals that take part in competitions. Many more are common American mixtures of several kinds of cats.Most house cats live a good life. They are not expected to work for their food. Instead, they rule their homes like furry kings and queens. They wait for their owners to serve them.Americans are increasingly serious about their cats. These concerns have made the care of cats into big business.Each year, cat owners buy tons of food especially prepared for cats. They buy toys and other equipment. They buy jewelry and clothes for themselves with images of cats on them. Some owners even bury their dead pets in special burial grounds.Humans have loved and respected cats for centuries. Scientists have evidence that cats and people lived together as long as 8000 years ago. The small house cat was once a highly honored animal. In ancient Egypt, for example, people who killed a cat could be punished by death.Early in American history cats were not treated as gods, however. They probably arrived in the United States with settlers and traders from Europe. These cats worked. They killed rats and mice.Sometimes, Americans mistreated their cats. During the early days of the nation, religious extremists believed that some cats were working for the devil. Black cats were especially suspected of being evil.Later, American families who had enough food began taking cats into their homes. People cared for the cats because the animals gave them pleasure. The cats thanked people for feeding them by making a purring sound. This pleasant noise usually means a cat is happy.Animal experts offer several reasons why cats have become so popular as house pets. They say cats need less care than dogs. And cats do not seem to suffer as much as dogs from being alone if the owners are away.Still, millions of other people do not like cats at all. They say dogs are better and more loving pets. They say cats do not have much feeling. They believe cats stay with people only to be fed. Cat owners defend their pets against such criticism. They say cats are just much more independent than dogs.A student of animal medicine explains the situation this way: dogs follow you around — they want you to talk to them and play with them a lot of the time. Cats like more space and more privacy — this does not mean they do not love their owners.Task 8【答案】Little Steve has a pet rabbit, Bunny. He plays with it every day after school. One day his mother sees that her little boy is holding Bunny by the ears. From time to time he gives the poor rabbit an angry shake and says: “How much is two plus two”“Steve,” says his mother, “Why do you treat your poor little Bunny that way”“Well,” explains Steve angrily, “Our teacher says that rabbits multiply very quickly, but this dummy can’t even add.”Task 9【答案】Most mammals live on land, but not all of them. Millions of years ago, some mammals went back to the sea and lived there. The legs of these animals disappeared, and after a long time they looked like fish. These animals became whales and dolphins.Whales and dolphins are still like other mammals in many ways. They are warm-blooded and they breathe air. They also have big brains. That is why they are more intelligent than fish. Whales have the biggest brains in the world. Their brain is bigger than the brain of a human being.。

  1. 1、下载文档前请自行甄别文档内容的完整性,平台不提供额外的编辑、内容补充、找答案等附加服务。
  2. 2、"仅部分预览"的文档,不可在线预览部分如存在完整性等问题,可反馈申请退款(可完整预览的文档不适用该条件!)。
  3. 3、如文档侵犯您的权益,请联系客服反馈,我们会尽快为您处理(人工客服工作时间:9:00-18:30)。

现代大学英语听力听力原文及题目答案U n i t 公司内部档案编码:[OPPTR-OPPT28-OPPTL98-OPPNN08]I had two months until my new job began. It was like waiting an entire summer for school to start. I spent those two months talking to figure skating coaches and judges. I read boring rule books. I drove to the rinks where the skaters trained, and made notes about our conversations. I even took a lesson, which made some of the skaters laugh.Unit 6Task 1【答案】A.[d]—[b]—[a]—[e]—[c]B.a【原文】Laura usually leaves the offices of Quest Productions at about 5 o'clock, but last Monday she left at 5:30. She wanted to get home by 6:30 and she ran to the bus stop but she couldn't get on a bus. There were too many people and not enough buses. Laura was desperate to get home so she decided to go by tube.In the station she went to one of the automatic ticket machines but she didn't have enough change, so she had to join the queue at the ticket window. She bought her ticket and ranto the escalator. Laura went to the platform and waited for the tube. It arrived and the crowd moved forward.Laura was pushed into the train. It was almost full but she was given a seat by a man with a moustache. Laura thanked him and sat down. She started to read her newspaper. In the tunnel the train stopped suddenly and Laura was thrown to the floor together with the man with the moustache. Somebody screamed. The lights went out. It was quarter past 6 on a cold, wet December evening.Task 2【答案】A.1) a 2) b 3) d 4) cB.1) T 2) T 3) FC.wondered; television plays; exciting; every cigarette lighter; tape recorder; held in a certain way; the touch of a gold ring against the hand of; reveal; How wrong they were【原文】X was a secret agent. He had rented a furnished room in a provincial town not far from the public park and had been theretwo weeks. He was standing at the window looking out at thedull beds of geraniums, the park gates and the cold, uninviting statue of Queen Victoria that stood across the street from him, It was raining hard and the few people who passed by looked wet and miserable. X was miserable, too. How, he wondered, could anybody think there was anything interesting about the life of a secret agent He knew it was because people had seen so many television plays about glamorous spies that they thought the life of a secret agent was exciting. They were convinced that every cigarette lighter concealed a secret tape recorder; that a fountain pen held in a certain way would open a locked door, that the touch of a gold ring against the hand of an enemy would make him reveal all his secrets. How wrong they were! He looked round his room. The wallpaper was in the worst possible taste, the pictures horrible, the carpet worn, dirty and faded; and he was cold. This was the third Monday he had come to the window to look out. He prayed it would be the last.As if in answer to his prayer, a certain meeting he had been sent to investigate was about to take place. He took out his camera. Just beneath the statue two women had stopped to speak. He knew one of them, and it was she who pointed in hisdirection. The other woman looked up towards him and in thatbrief moment he photographed her.Task 3【答案】A.B.1) a 2) b 3) c 4) b 5) d【原文】Harry: Well, Robert, have you made up your mind yet what you want to do when you leave collegeNora: Oh Harry. Surely he's a bit young to decide on his career. He hasn't even got to college yet.Harry: Not at all, Nora. It's wisest to decide in good time.Look at me, for example. I really wanted to be a sailor,but now I spend my days sitting at a desk in an office.Yes, it's silly to train for the wrong job. And after all, Robert will be going to college soon.Nora: Now if I were a man I'd be a farmer. To see the crops growing--that's my idea of a good life.Harry: Yes, and to see the money rolling in is more important still.Robert: Well, that's not the way I look at it, Dad. It's thejob I care about, not the money.Harry: Maybe not; but you'll learn to care about the money too, when you've got a family to keep.Nora: And of course Peter — well, he's keen to be a racing driver, or else an explorer.Robert: Oh, Peter's not old enough to make up his mind about such things.Harry: You haven't answered my question yet, Robert. Whatwould you like to doNora: Are you sure you don't want to be a farmer, Robert Or a market gardenerRobert: No, I'm sorry Mum, but I don't want to at all. I'd rather be a civil engineer. I want to build roads andbridges.Harry: Not ships Isn't it better to be a shipbuilding engineer Robert: Look here, is it my career we're planning, or yoursHarry: All fight, all right, there's no need to lose your temper. But you'd better win that scholarship first.Task 4【答案】I. correspondents; columnistA. may not need eitherB. to go to places where events take place and write stories about themII. first; bigger; better; who will soon leave to work for other peopleIII. working hours; free time; work long hours to begin with 【原文】Here are some of the things a young man or woman should not do when he first asks an editor for a job:He should not tell the editor that he wants to be a foreign correspondent or a columnist. Very probably the editor does not need either. He wants a reporter who will go to such places as government offices and police stations and write a true story of what is happening there. Being a foreign correspondent or a columnist will come later.A young person should not tell tile editor that newspaper work is only the first step on the way to bigger and better jobs, such as those in government. The editor must take a lot of time and trouble teaching someone to be a good newspapermanor woman. He does not like the idea of teaching people who are soon going to leave him to work for someone else.A young journalist should accept the working hours andfree time the editor gives him. As a new journalist, it is very probable that he will work longer hours than others and work on weekends. The editor did the same when he was a young newspaperman with no experience. He expects a journalist to understand how things are on a newspaper.Task 5【答案】A.1) acd 2) abeB.1) she is the wrong sex 2) she wears the wrong clothes【原文】SYLVIA: We've got a new manager in our department.LARRY: Oh You hoped to get that job, didn't you?SYLVIA: Yes, I did.LARRY: I'm sorry. That's too bad. Who is it Who got the job, I mean?SYLVIA: Someone called Drexler. Carl Drexler. He's been with the company only two years. I've been here longer. And I know more about the job, too!LARRY: Hmm. Why do you think they gave it to him and not to you?SYLVIA: Because I'm the wrong sex, of course !LARRY: You mean you didn't get the job because you're a woman?SYLVIA: Yes, that was probably it! It isn't fair.LARRY: What sort of clothes does he wear?SYLVTA: A dark suit. White shirt. A tie. Why?LARRY: Perhaps that had something to do with it.SYLVIA: You mean you think I didn't get the job because I come to work in jeans and a sweater?LARRY: It's possible, isn't it?SYLVIA: Do you really think I should wear different clothes?LARRY: Well. . . perhaps you should think about it.SYLVTA: Why should I wear a skirt Or a dress?LARRY: I'm not saying you should. I'm saying you should think about it. That's all!SYLVIA: Why should I do that I'm good at my job! That's the only important thing!LARRY: Hmm. Perhaps it should be the only important thing. But it isn't. Not inthis company.Task 6【答案】A.B.1st speaker(bcd) 2nd speaker(ae)C.1) F 2) F【原文】Al: Is this the right line to file a claimBob: Yeah. It's the same line for everything. You just stand here and wait.Al: Oh. Is there always such a long lineBob: Every week. Sometimes longer. Is this your first time here Al: Yes.Bob: What happened Your plant closed downAl: No. I'm a car salesman, or, I was a car salesman. But we just aren't selling cars. It's the interest rates. Twoyears ago, I averaged ten new cars a month. Do you know how many cars I sold last month One. One car to a lady who had the cash. But the interest rates are up again. The boss let three of us go. How about youBob: I worked at a vacuum cleaner plant with about fifty workers. We put in a good day's work. But the machinery was getting old. As a matter of fact, the whole plant was old.So the management decided to build a new plant. You knowwhere In Singapore. The workers here made about sevendollars an hour, a couple of people made eight or nine an hour. You know how much they're paying the workers inSingapore $ an hour! Anyway, all fifty of us got laid off. Al: How long ago was thatBob: They closed down ten months ago.Al: Any luck finding another jobBob: Nothing. I have one, sometimes two, interviews a week.Last week I thought I had something. They liked myexperience with machines. But I never heard from them again. Al: At least you know something about machines. All I can dois talk.Bob: Maybe you'll talk yourself into another job. Good luck.I'll see you here next week.Al: I hope not. I hope I'll have something by then.Task 7【答案】A.1) F 2) F 3) T 4) F 5) T 6) FB.1) According to the first speaker, it is frustrating becausethe teacher cannot see clearly the results of his efforts.2) According to the second speaker, English language teachingis a good job, because it guarantees a stable income andregular working hours and means less pressure. He also likesthe way elderly teacher are.【原文】Interviewer: Do you prefer what you're doing to teaching?John Smith: Yes, one of the things I found a bit frustrating about teaching was that it was rather,very intangible than um, especially if you're teaching in England and most of the students know quite a lot of English before they arrive. They learn a lot of English outside the classroom, in pubs or coffee shops or other places, with the families they're living with. It's very difficult to pin down how much they learn from your actual lesson, whereas in marketing um, again there are lots of areas that are gray rather than black or white, but there are quite a few other areas where one can see quite clearly the results of one's efforts.Interviewer: What did you do after you quit your job in advertisingSecond Man: In fact, I became a journalist and I worked as a freelance. I didn't have a full-time job with anynewspaper. I just had to contribute things as theycame along and 1 wrote for magazines, and I didquite a lot of broadcasting for the VOA. Well, thiswas in a way the opposite of advertising because Ienjoyed it a lot but I found it very hard to earnenough money to live on.Interviewer: And then you decided to be a teacherSecond Man: Well, and so I thought. Well, I must do something which produces an income that I can be sure of.While I was working as a journalist I had done anarticle for a magazine about the English languageteaching world and m fact I had come to the schoolwhere I now teach as a journalist and interviewed alot of the people. And I thought it seemed a verynice place and I thought that the classes I visitedhad a very, very nice feeling about them, and so Ithought, well, I'll see if they'll have me.Interviewer: Why do you prefer teaching to advertisingSecond Man: Well, partly because in teaching you work regular hours. It I advertising you just had to stay at theoffice until the work was finished [I see.] and itcould be three o'clock in the morning. [Oh, dean]Also you were very often made to work at weekends.Often some job would come up that was very importantand they said it had to be finished — it had to gointo the newspapers next week.Interviewer: So there was a lot mom pressure.Second Man: There was a lot more pressure in advertising. Also, the people I worked with when I was first inadvertising were young hopeful people like myself.By the end I was working with a lot of old peoplewho quite honestly were awful. And I kept looking atthem and saying, "Am I going to be like that" And Ithought if I am I'd better get out, whereas theEnglish language teachers I saw, who were olderpeople I thought, well, they seemed quite nice. AndI wouldn't mind being like that myself.Task 8【答案】The interview with Michale:The interview with Chris:【原文】Matthew:?? Michael, do you go out to workMichael:?? Not regularly, no. I... I used to; I used to have a job in a publishing company, but Idecided it wasn't really what I wanted to do and that whatI wanted to do wouldn't earn me much money, so I gave upworking and luckily I had a private income from my family to support me and now I do the things I want to do. Someof them get paid like lecturing and teaching, and othersdon't.Matthew: What are the advantages of not having to go to work from nine till fiveMichael: Ah... there' re two advantages really. One is that if you feel tired you don't have to get up, and the other is that you can spend your time doing things you want to dorather than being forced to do the same thing all the time. Matthew: But surely that's in a sense very self-indulgent and very lucky because most of us have to go out and earn our livings. Do you feel justified in having this privilegedpositionMichael: Yes, because I think I use it well. I do things whichI think are useful to people and the community and which Ienjoy doing.Matthew: Chris, what do you think the value of work isChris: Well, I think in our present-day society, for most people, work has very little value at all. Most of us goout to work for about eight to nine hours of our workingday. We do things which are either totally futile andtotally useless or have very little justificationwhatsoever, and for most of us the only reason for working is that we need to keep ourselves alive, to pay forsomewhere to live, to pay to feed our children.Matthew: But surely people wouldn't know what to do if they didn't have to go to workChris: Well, again this raises the sort of two main aspects of work. Should we think of 'work only as a sort of bread-winning process, and this is very much the role it has in current society, or should we take a much widerperspective on work and think of all the possible sort of activities that human beings could be doing during the dayI think the sort of distinction currently is between say,someone who works in a car factory and who produces cars which are just adding to pollution, to over-consumption of vital resources, who is doing something which is veryharmful, both to our environment and to, probably society, to contrast his work with someone perhaps like a doctor, who I think in any society could be justified as doing a very valuable job and one which incidentally is satisfying to the person who is doing it.Matthew: What do you do Is your job just a breadwinning process or do you get some satisfaction out of doing it Chris: Well, in the job I do find that most of thesatisfaction is a mental one; it's coming to grips withthe problems of my subject and with the problems ofteaching in the University. Clearly this is the type ofsatisfaction that most people doing what we call inEngland "white-collar" jobs. This is quite different fromthe sort of craftsman, who is either working that hishands or with his skills on a machine, or from peopleperhaps who are using artistic skills, which are of aquite different character. Certainly it's becoming aphenomena that people who do "white-collar jobs during theday, who work with their minds to some extent, people whowork on computers, people who are office clerks, bankemployees, these people have fairly soul-destroying jobswhich nevertheless don't involve much physical effort,that they tend to come home and do "do-it-yourself"activities at home. They make cupboard, paint their houses, repair their cars, which somehow provide the sort ofphysical job satisfaction that they're denied in theirworking day.Task 9【答案】A.B.1) No major change. For some→“less paperwork”Some:→less working hoursOthers:→earn more money.2) Most adults→would go on working.Esp. young adults (18 to 24)→9 out of 10 would go on working 【原文】Are most workers today feeling bored and dissatisfied with their jobs It is often claimed that they are. Yet a study conducted by Parade magazine more than 20 years ago showed that people at that time felt the opposite.Parade asked questions of a representative sampling of adult Americans from coast to coast. The sampling included different sexes, age groups, and occupations.The interviewees were asked to make a choice from one of the following three to describe their feelings towards their work.A. Like their jobs.B. Dislike their jobs.C. Like their jobs in part,Results showed that 91 percent of the male interviewees and 84 percent of the females chose A, while only 5 percent men and 12 percent women interviewed chose B. The rest said that they liked their jobs in part and they comprised a very tow percentage.In all the three age groups — from 18 to 24, from 25 to 29 and 30 to 39 — those who liked theirjobs made up the majority. 70 percent, 88 percent and 92 percent respectively choose A. Those choosing B accounted for 20 percent, 9 percent and 8 percent of different age groups. And the rest, 6 percent, 3 percent and 0 percent respectively claimed that they only liked their jobs in part.The difference in responses among people with different occupations is small. Among the white-collar employees, those choosing A, B and C are 87 percent, 8 percent and 4 percent of the total. And for the blue-collar employees, 91 percent, 5 percent and 3 percent choose A, B and C respectively.It is interesting to note that there are few differencesin attitude between men and women, professionals and factoryworkers. In each group, the largest number reported that they liked their jobs.Next, Parade asked, "If there were one thing you could change about your job, what would it be" It was expected that many would wish to make their jobs less boring, but very few gave this reply. No major changes were reported. Some wishedfor "less paperwork"; many would shorten their working hours,but others would like more hours in order to earn more money.No serious complaints were made.Most people have to work in order to live. But what would happen if someone had enough money to stop working Parade asked, "If you inherited a million dollars, would you go on working —either at your present job or something you liked better--or would you quit work" The answers showed that most adults would prefer to work, even if they didn't have to. This is true especially of the younger adults aged 18-24. Of these, nine out often said they would go on working, even if they suddenly became millionaires.Task 10【答案】A.B.1) F 2) TC.1) b 2) aD.1. She really enjoyed meeting new people.2. She had good qualifications in English and Maths.3. She did not mind hard work, even if it was not always pleasant.4. She liked living away form home.【原文】Officer: Come in, please take a seat. I'm the careers officer. You're Cathy, aren't you?Mother: That's right. This is Catherine Hunt, and I'm her mother.Officer: How do you do, Mrs. Hunt Hello, Catherine.Cathy: Hello. Pleased to meet you.Officer: And you'd like some advice about choosing a career- Mother: Yes, she would. Wouldn't you, Catherine?Cathy: Yes, please.Officer: Well, just let me ask a few questions to begin with. How old are you, Catherine?Mother: She's nineteen. Well, she's almost nineteen.Officer: And what qualifications have you got?Mother: Well, qualifications from school, of course. Very good results she got. And she got certificates for ballet and for playing the piano.Officer: Is that what you're interested in, Catherine, dancing and musicCathy: Well...Mother: Ever since she was a little girl, she's been very keen on music and dancing. She ought tobe a music teacher or something. She's quite willing totrain for a few more years to get the right job, aren'tyou, CatherineCathy: Well, if it's a good idea.Mother: There you are, you see. She's a good girl really, a bit lazy and disorganized sometimes,but she's very bright. I'm sure the careers officerwill have lots of jobs for you.Officer: Well, I'm afraid it's not as easy as that. There are many young people these days who can'tfind the job they want.Mother: I told you, Catherine. I told you, you shouldn't wear that dress. You have to look smart toget a job these days.Officer: I think she looks very nice. Mrs. Hunt, will you come into the other office for a momentand look at some of the information we have there. I'msure you'd like to see how we can help young people. Mother: Yes, I'd love to. Mind you, I think Catherine would bea nice teacher. She could work with young children. She'dlike that. Or she could be a vet. She's always lookingafter sick animals.Officer: I'm afraid there's a lot of competition. You need very good results to be a vet. This way, Mrs. Hunt. Just wait a minute, Catherine.(The mother exits.)Officer: There are just one or two more things, Catherine. Cathy: Do call me Cathy.Officer: OK, Cathy. Are you really interested in being a vetCathy: Not really. Anyway, I'm not bright enough. I'm reasonably intelligent, but I'm not brilliant. I'm afraid my mother is a bit over-optimistic.Officer: Yes, I guessed that. She's a bit overpowering, isn't she, your mumCathy: A bit. But she's very kind.Officer: I'm sure she is. So, you're interested in ballet and music, are youCathy: Not really. My mother sent me to lessons when I was six, so I'm quite good, I suppose. But I don't think I want to do that for the rest of my life, especially music. It's so lonely.Officer: What do you enjoy doingCathy: Well, I like playing tennis, and swimming. Oh, I went to France with the school choir last year. I really enjoyedthat. And I like talking to people. But I suppose you mean real interests — things that would help me to get a job Officer: No. I'm more interested in what you really want to do.You like talking to people, do youCathy: Oh yes, I really enjoy meeting new people.Officer: Do you think you would enjoy teachingCathy: No, no, I don't really. I was never very interested in school work, and I'd like to do something different.Anyway, there's a teacher training college very near us.It would be just like going to school again.Officer: So you don't want to go on trainingCathy: Oh, I wouldn't mind at all, not for something useful. I wondered about being a hairdresser — you meet lots ofpeople, and you learn to do something properly—but Idon't know. It doesn't seem very worthwhile.Officer: What about nursingCathy: Nursing In a hospital Oh, I couldn't do that, I'm not good enough.Officer: Yes, you are. You've got good qualifications in English and Maths. But it is very hard work.Cathy: Oh, I don't mind that.Officer: And it's not very pleasant sometimes.Cathy: That doesn't worry me either. Mum's right. I do look after sick animals. I looked after our dog when it was run over by a car. My mother was sick, but I didn't mind. Iwas too worried about the dog. Do you really think I could be a nurseOfficer: I think you could be a very good nurse. You'd have to leave home, of course.Cathy: I rather think I should enjoy that.Officer: Well, don't decide all at once. Here's someinformation about one or two other things which might suit you. Have a look through it before you make up your mind.Task 11【原文】I began my career during college, reporting on news stories at a Toronto radio station. The station’s program manager was also a professor who taught one of my classes. I convinced him that she needed a youth reporter because that year was International Youth Year. After graduation, I took a job as a television news reporter and later, news anchor. But sports reporting was something different, so I decided to try it. Figure skating was my first assignment.I had two months until my new job began. It was like waiting an entire summer for school to start. I spent those two months talking to figure skating coaches and judges. I read boring rule books. I drove to the rinks where the skaters trained, and made notes about our conversations. I even took a lesson, which made some of the skaters laugh.。

相关文档
最新文档